Yamaha BD-S473 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Reproductores de Blu-Ray
Tipo
El manual del propietario
@YAMAHA
Blu-ray Disc Player
Lecteur Blu-ray Disc
BD-$473
Owner's Manual
Mode d'emploi
Bedienungsanleitung
Bruksanvisning
Manuale di istruzioni
Manual de Instrucciones
Gebruiksaanwijzing
I _YAMAHA
®
J,
_q
m
ii
am
HI
am
F
Important notes for users in the
U.K.
Mains plug
This apparatus is fitted with an approved 13 Amp
plug. To change a fuse in this type of plug proceed
as follows:
1 Remove fuse cover and fuse.
2 Fix new fuse which should be a BS1362 5 Amp,
A.S.T.
3 Refit the fuse cover.
If the fitted plug is not suitable for your jack outlets,
it should be cut off and an appropriate plug fitted in
its place.
If the mains plug contains a fuse, this should have a
value of 5 Amp. If a plug without a fuse is used, the
fuse at the distribution board should not be greater
than 5 Amp.
Note: The severed plug must be disposed to avoid a
possible shock hazard should it be inserted into a 13
Amp jack elsewhere.
How to connect a plug
The wires in the mains lead are coloured with the
following code:
blue = neutral (N), brown = live (L).
As these colours may not correspond with the
colour markings identifying the terminals in your
plug, proceed as follows:
- Connect the blue wire to the terminal marked N
or coloured black
- Connect the brown wire to the terminal marked
L or coloured red.
- Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal
in the plug, marked E (or e) or coloured green (or
green and yellow).
Before replacing the plug cover, make certain that
the cord grip is clamped over the sheath of the lead -
not simply over the two wires.
Copyright in the U.K.
Recording and playback of material may require
consent. See Copyright Act 1956 and The
Performer's Protection Acts 1958 to 1972.
->
J
VAROITUS
Muiden kuin tfissf esitettyjen toimintojen sffid6n tai
asetusten muutto saattaa altistaa vaaralliselle sfiteilylle tai
muille vaarallisille toiminnoille.
DK
Advarsel: Usynlig laserstrfiling ved fibning nfir
sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgfi uts_ettelse
for strfiling.
Bem_erk: Netafbryderen @ er sekund_ert indkoblet og
olFryder ikke strCmmen Ira nettet. Den indbyggede netdel
er derfor tilsluttet til lysnettet sfi henge netstikket sidder i
stikkontakten.
N
Observer: Nettbryteren IQ)er sekundert innkoplet. Den
innebygdenetdelen er derfor ikke frakoplet nettet sfi lenge
apparatet er tilsluttet nettkontakten.
S
Klass 1 laseraparat
Varning! Om apparaten anvfnds pfi annat sfttl_fn i denna
bruksanvisning specificerats, kan anvfndaren utsfttas f6r
osynlig laserstrfilning, som 6verskrider grfnsen f6r
laserklass 1.
Observera! StrOmbrytaren @ air sekundfrt kopplad och
inte bryter inte strOmmen frfin nftet. Den inbyggda
nftdelen fr dfrf6r ansluten till elnftet sfi lfinge
stickproppen sitter i vfgguttaget.
SF
Luokan 1laserlaite
Varoitus! Laitteen kfyttfminen muulla kuin tfssf
kfyttOohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kfyttfjfn
turvallisuusluokan 1ylittfvflle nfikymfttOmflle
lasersfteilylle.
Oikeus muutoksiin varataan. Laite ei saa olla alttiina
tippu-j a roiskevedelle.
Toiminnanvalitsin IQ)on kytketty toisiopuolelle, eikf se
kytke laitetta irti sfihk6verkosta. Sisfifinrakennettu verkko-
osa on kytkettynf sfhk6verkkoon aina silloin, kun pistoke
on pistorasiassa.
VARO!
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
NAKYMATT6MALLE LASERSATEILYLLE.
)kL)k KATSO S)k TEESEEN.
VARNING!
OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL
)kR OPPNAD OCH SPARREN AR URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRA.LEN.
Caution-i en
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
AVERTISSEMENT
L'utilisation de commandes et l'emploi de r_glages ou
de m_thodes autres que ceux d_crits ci-dessous,
peuvent entrai'ner une exposition _ un rayonnement
dangereux.
VORSICHT
Die Verwendung von Bedienelementen oder die
Einstellung bzw. die Ausfiihrung von anderen als in
dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Vorgangen kann zu
Gefahrdung durch gefahrliche Strahlung fiihren.
OBSERVERA
Anvandning av reglage eller justeringar eller utfi_rande
av fitgarder pglannat satt an sfi som beskrivs hari kan
resultera i farlig strfilning.
ATTENZIONE
L'uso di controlli, regolazioni, operazioni o procedure
non specificati in questo manuale possono risultare in
esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.
PRECAUCION
El uso de los controles, los ajustes o los procedimientos
que no se especifican enste manual pueden causar una
exposici6n peligrosa a la radiaci6n.
LET OP
Gebruik van bedieningsorganen, instellingen of
procedures anders dan beschreven in dit document kan
leiden tot blootstelling aan gevaarlijke stralen.
OAUTION:INVISIBLELASERRADIATIONWHENOPEN.
DONOTSTAREINTOBEAM.
DANGER:INVISIBLELASERRADIATIONWHENOPEN.
AVOIDDIRECTEXPOSURETOTHEBEAM.
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstr. 22-34 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-303-0
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
Caution-ii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this rnanual
carefully, Keep it in a safe place for future reference,
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place-away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,
moisture, and/or cold, For proper ventilation, allow the
following rninirnum clearances.
Top : 10 cm (4 ill)
Rear: 10 cm (4 ill)
Side: 10 cm (4 ill)
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an enviromnent with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
- Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
- Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
- Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and
liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
.10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
.11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
"12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting
from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
"13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable
disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning
storln.
"14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
"15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
"16 Be sure to read the "Troubleshooting" section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
"1"/ Before moving this unit, press (J.) to set this unit to the
standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the
wall outlet.
"18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature
changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the
outlet, then leave this unit alone.
"19 When using this unit for a long time, this unit may become
warm. Turn the power off, then leave this unit alone for
cooling.
20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
2"1 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source
as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this
unit itself is turned off by IQ). This state is called the
standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
The laser component in this product is capable of
emitting radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1.
LASER Specification:
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave length: 790 nm (CDs)/658 nm (DVDs)/405 nm (BDs)
Laser output: max. 1 mW
LASER SAFETY
This unit employs a laser. Due to possible eye injury, only
a qualified service person should remove the cover or
attempt to service this device.
DANGER
This unit emits visible laser radiation when open. Avoid
direct eye exposure to beam. When this unit is plugged
into the wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the
opening of the disc tray and other openings to look into
inside.
Caution-iii E,
What you can do with this Player ..................... 2
Supplied parts .................................................... 2
About discs and files ......................................... 3
Types of discs/files that cm_ be used vdth this Phtyer .... 3
Loading a disc ................................................................. 4
Disc precautions ............................................................. 4
Notice lbr watching 3D video images ............................ 4
Cinavia technology ......................................................... 4
Controls and functions ...................................... 5
Front pm_el ...................................................................... 5
Rear panel ....................................................................... 5
Remote control ............................................................... 6
HDMI connection .............................................. 10
Connecting to the HDMI terminal ................................ 10
Connection for the playback of Blu-ray 3D Discs ....... 10
Network and USB connection ......................... 11
Connecting to the NETWORK terminal ...................... 11
Connecting to the USB connector ................................ 11
Initial Wizard/Easy Setup ................................. 12
Setting with the Initial Wizard/Easy Setup ................... 12
HOME/MEDIA menu ......................................... 1:3
Playing back photo/music/video ................................... 13
Using network content .................................................. 15
Using network services ................................... 16
Playing videos from YouTube TM ..................... 16
Advanced playback operation ........................ 17
On Screen menu ............................................................ 17
Status menu ................................................................... 18
Using Bookmark ........................................................... 19
Program play ................................................................. 19
Using Search ................................................................ 19
Enjoying BONUSVIEW I_ and BD-Live I_ ................. 20
Using Picture in Picture function
(secondary audio/video playback) ........................... 20
Using the fc,ature of BD-Live lxj ................................... 20
SETUP menu ..................................................... 21
Example of SETUP menu operation ............................. 23
General Setting .............................................................. 24
Display Setting .............................................................. 26
Audio Setting ................................................................ 27
System Information ....................................................... 27
About the audio output formats .................................... 28
About the vide() output formats .................................... 29
Software upgrade ............................................. 30
Upgrading the software ................................................. 30
Troubleshooting ............................................... 31
Pox_er ............................................................................ 31
Basic operation .............................................................. 31
Disc playback ................................................................ 31
Picture ........................................................................... 32
Sound ............................................................................ 32
Network ......................................................................... 33
Messages on the screen ................................................. 33
Glossary ............................................................ 34
Specifications ................................................... 35
General .......................................................................... 35
Input/output ................................................................... 35
Copyright ...................................................................... 36
Index .................................................................. 37
(at the end of this manual)
Information about software .................................... i
About this manual
- This manual describes how to operate this Player
using a remote control except when it is not
available. Some of these operations are also
available using the front panel buttons.
- Notes contain important information about safety
and operating instructions. Hint(s) indicates a tip for
your operation.
- This manual is printed prior to production. Design
and specifications are subject to change in part as a
result of improvements, etc. In case of differences
between the manual and the product, the product has
priority.
The icons used in this manual
Icons are used to indicate available buttons/functions for a
particular format. For details on playable discs and
formats, see page 3.
: BD-Video
|: DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DVD+VR
: Audio CD
IkTJl'_[q : Video files
: Audio files
_l_'i_ : Photo files
1En
Easy setting for language, resolution, screen aspect ratio _ p. 12
You can perform language and TV settings.
In addition to Blu-ray Discs, this Player also supports playback of a variety of other discs.
You can enjoy additional movies on the latest Blu-ray Discs.
Play back Video, Music, Photo files on a disc/USB memory device_ p, 13
Files recorded on discs/USB memory devices can be played back with this Player.
. . , _*
Play back V=deo, Mus=c, Photo f=les on a Home Network Server p. 15
PC contents can be played back with TV or AV receiver by connecting this Player to a network
server.
Connecting devices with an HDMI cable, you can control devices with a single remote control
using the HDMI Control function.
You can instantly enjoy videos over the internet with this Player.
* For details on playable discs and formats, see page 3.
** Network setting is needed to use this function.
Make sure the following accessories are provided with the product.
Remote control Batteries (x2)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
2 En
Types of discs/files that can be
used with this Player
- 12 cm (5") and 8 cm (3") discs can be played back in
this Player. Do not use an 8 cm (3") to 12 cm (5")
adapter.
- Use discs that conform to compatible standards as
indicated by the presence of official logos on the
disc label. Playback of discs not complying with
these standards is not guaranteed. In addition, the
image quality or sound quality is not guaranteed
even if the discs can be played back.
Media Type i Recording Format
BD-ROM/BD-R/
BD-RE
DVD-ROM
DVD-R/DVD-R
DL/DVD-RW
DVD+R/DVD+R
DL/DVD+RW
CD-ROM
CD-R/CD-RW
USB*
DLNA
BD-Video/Data files
DVD-Video
DVD-Video/DVD-VR/AVCHD/Data files
DVD-Video/DVD+VR/AVCHD/Data files
CDDA/HDCD
CDDA/Data files
Data files
Data files
This Player is compatible with a USB memory device
formatted with FAT 16/32 and NTFS.
Playable audio
fi! e formats
MP3 (.rap3)
WMA (.wma)
AAC (.aac/.m4a)
WAV (.way)
FLAC (.flac)
Playable video
file formats
MKV with H.264
(.inky)
MPEG PS (.mpeg/
.mpg)
MPEG TS (.ts)
MPEG-4 (.rap4)
VOB (.w_b)
AVI (.avi)
ASF (.asf)
WMV (.wmv)
Playable phot °
file formats
JPEG (.jpeg/.jpg)
GIF (.gif)
PNG (.png)
- Playback of a file listed in the chart above is not
guaranteed depending on methods of file creation or
codecs used.
- A copyright protected file cannot be played back.
- When using DLNA, a file needs to meet the DLNA
sever requirement.
Region management information for
Blu-ray Disc/DVD videos
- Blu-ray Disc/DVD video players and discs have
region codes, which dictate the regions in which a
disc can be played. Verify the region code mark on
the rear panel of this Player.
- For a Blu-ray Disc, the disc can be played back on
this Player with the same region code mark, or the
region code "ABC" mark.
- For a DVD disc, the disc can be played back on this
Player with the same region code mark, or the region
code "ALL" mark.
Examples of region codes
BD-Video
Region code "A" or "ABC"
DVD-Video
Region code "1" or "ALL"
- Blu-ray Disc/DVD video operations and functions
may be different from the explanations in this
manual and some operations may be prohibited due
to disc manufacturer's settings.
- If a menu screen or operating instructions are
displayed during playback of a disc, follow the
operating procedure displayed.
- Playback for some of the discs may not be possible
depending on the disc.
- Finalize all recording media that is played back in
this Player.
- "Finalize" refers to a recorder processing a recorded
disc so that it will play in other players/recorders as
well as this Player. Only finalized discs can be
played back in this Player. (This Player does not
have a function to finalize discs.)
- Playback of all files on the disc, USB memory
device and network is not guaranteed.
- A copyright protected file cannot be played back via
USB memory device and network.
Audio file requirement
- Sampling frequency: within 32 - 48 kHz (MP3/
WMA), LPCM 44.1 kHz/16 bit/Stereo (WAV),
192 kHz/24 bit (FLAC)
- Bitrate: within 8 - 320 kbps (MP3), 32 - 192 kbps
(WMA)
WMV file requirement
- WMV9,maximum resolution is 1,920x 1,080.
=7
e-
3En
IV,_V,37Trfir; l_._,_.*fq ,_,Elh._
Loading a disc
- Insert the disc with the label facing up.
- In case of the disc recorded on both sides, face down
the side to play back.
- Playback may begin automatically, depending on the
disc and setting of this Player.
- The menu may be displayed first, depending on the disc.
- The disc load time may vary depending on the disc.
Disc precautions
Be careful of scratches and dust
- Blu-ray Disc, DVD and CD discs are sensitive to dust,
fingerprints and especially scratches. A scratched disc
may not be able to be played back. Handle discs with
care and store them in a sale place.
Proper disc storage
Ph,ccthediscinthecemerof d_edisccase _ _.
andstorethecaseanddiscupright.
Avoid storin_ discs in locations subjecl to w _'(5 -
direct sunligl_t, close to heating appliances _:,_,,,y- "
or in locations o1'high humidity. _-2._
Do not drop discs or subject them to _7])
strong vibrations or impacts. "_
Avoid sloring discs in locations where d__. (,_
there are large amounts (1["dust or _,_ c
moismre, q9 _ _-J
(
Handling precautions
- It the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a
soft, damp (water only) cloth. When
wiping discs, always move the cloth from
the center hole toward the outer edge.
- Do not use record cleaning sprays,
benzene, thinner, static electricity
prevention liquids or any other solvent.
- Do not touch the surface.
- Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.
- If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched,
the Player may decide that the disc is incompatible
and eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc
correctly. Wipe any dirt off the playing surface with
a soft cloth.
Cleaning the pick up lens
- Never use commercially available cleaning discs.
The use of these discs can damage the lens.
- Request the nearest service center approved by
Yamaha to clean the lens.
Notice for watching 3D video
images
- Some people may experience discomfort (such as
eye strain, fatigue, or nausea) while watching 3D
video images. We recommend that all viewers take
regular breaks while watching 3D video images.
- If you experience any discomfort, stop watching the
3D video images until the discomfort subsides.
Consult a doctor if you experience severe
discomfort.
- Read the owner's manuals (Blu-ray Disc and TV)
and/or the caution messages that appear on the TV
carefully.
- The vision of young children (especially those under
six years old) is still under development. Consult
your doctor (such as a pediatrician or eye doctor)
before allowing young children to watch 3D video
images.
- Adults should supervise young children to ensure
they follow the recommendations described above.
Cinavia technology
- Cinavia technology is a part of the content protection
system included in your Blu-ray Disc Player.
- The following messages may be displayed and
playback stopped or audio outputs temporarily
muted by your Blu-ray Disc player if you are playing
an unauthorized copy of content that is protected by
Cinavia technology.
These messages are displayed in English only.
Playback stopped. The content being played is
protected by Cinavia TM and is not authorized
for playback on this device.
For more information, see http://www.cinavia.com.
Message Code 1.
Audio outputs temporarily muted. Do not adjust
the playback volume. The content being played
is protected by Cinavia TM and is not authorized
for playback on this device.
For more information, see http://www.cinavia.com.
Message Code 3.
Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of
unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced film
and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use
of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be
displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at
the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at
http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
4 En
u_B
=
i
=
=
i
g
O.,.
C
,,-z
@ _ (On/Standby)
Turns this Player on/Sets to standby mode.
Pressing and holding this button for approximately 5
seconds forcibly resets this Player (system reset).
@ Disc tray door
@ _. (Eject)
Opens/Closes the disc tray.
@ USB connector (p. 11)
@
@ Front panel display
Displays various information for operational status.
_ (Play)
Starts a playback.
@ _ _ (Pause)
Pauses a playback.
_ (Stop)
Stops a playback.
- A factory-fitted protective film covers the front panel of this Player. Remove the protective film from the Player
before operating it.
Rear panel
HDMI
netwoRK
usB_v=0_A
@ Power cable
This Player has a captive power cable. Connect it to an
AC outlet after all connections are made (p. 10).
@
- To prevent risk of electric shock, do not touch the
un-insulated parts of any cables while the power
cable is connected.
@ HDMI terminal (p. 10)
USB connector (p. 11)
NETWORK terminal (p. 11)
SEn
Remote control
- _ will appear on the top left corner of the screen
when the pressed button is not available.
@o
®
Infrared signal transmitter: Outputs infrared
signal. Aim this window to the remote control sensor
(p. 9).
MARKER | L_'_ : Sets Bookmark (p. 19) at
a specified point of a movie. After Bookmark is set, to
select the set point you want to jump to, press
DIGEST. You can set up to 12 Bookmarks.
(_ A : Opens/closes the disc tray.
PROGRAM | _ : Sets the order of playback
(p. 19). You can set up to 15 tracks (for an audio disc)
or titles/chapters (DVD-Video).
@ SHUFFLE _ _ _ _ _II_i'L_:
Selects shuffle play mode (p. 17).
REPEAT_ _ _ _
: Changes repeat mode. Repeat mode shown
below will change each time you press the button.
C_._: Repeats the title being played back.
{c_}: Repeats the chapter being played back.
C_: Repeats the folder being played back.
{A_=}:Repeats all tracks/files on the disc.
L=_: Repeats the track/file being played back.
(g) PIP ll'_Jl: Turns on/off the Picture in Picture (p. 20).
PIP Mark (["_-']) is displayed on the screen when this
function is available. You can also select this item from
On Screen menu (p. 17).
- PIP Markis displayed only whenthe PIP Mark is set
to on (p. 25).
2ND AUDIO Ir_J: Selects the secondary audio of the
Picture in Picture (p. 20) or audio commentaries. The
Secondary Audio Mark (["_) is displayed on the
screen when this function is available (p. 27). You can
also select this item from On Screen menu (p. 17).
- Secondary Audio Mark is displayed only when
Secondary Audio Mark is set to on (p. 25).
Number buttons: Enters numbers, or during
playback, jumps to the track/chapter corresponding to
the number you input. These buttons may not be
available depending on the disc type and playback
condition.
ENTER: Selects the focused menu/item.
STATUS: Displays the playback information (p. 18).
SUBTITLE _ _ _J=={_: Changes subtitle
languages (p. 35) if available. You can also select this
item from On Screen menu (p. 17).
6 En
@ HOME: Displays the HOME menu screen (p. 13).
@ DIGEST _IT_i_ : Shows 12 photo thumbnails.
When thumbnails are displayed, you can proceed to
the next/previous page with _/_lm,_.
| Ik_$l-ffffll : Displays Bookmark select bar
(p. 19).
@ IQ): Turns this Player on or sets it to standby mode.
@ ZOOM _ IkTi]'ffI=_NJ_l_1i_1: Zoomsin/out.
The size of the screen will change each time you press
the button (zoom in/out: 3 steps each).
@ Color buttons _ : Use these buttons according to
on-screen instructions.
@ A/B _ _ E _ INII_: Plays back
a specific part you want to repeat.
1 Press AJB at the scene where you want to set the
start point. "A-" is displayed on the screen.
2 Press AJB again at the scene where you want to set
the end point. "A-B" is displayed on the screen.
Repeat playback starts.
3 To cancel the repeat playback, press AJB. "A-B"
disappears and the repeat playback is finished.
- This function cannot be performed depending on the
specifications of the disc.
@ SEARCH_ | E _ _:
Jumps to a specified point during playback. For details
on this function, refer to "Using Search" (p. 19). You
can also select this item from status menu (p. 18).
@ SETUP: Displays SETUP menu screen (p. 21).
@ AUDIO _ _ : Changes the audio language or
format. You can also select this item from On Screen
menu (p. 17).
@ CLEAR: Clears entered number/set item.
@ ANGLE _ |: Changes the camera angle if
video is recorded with multiple angles. The Angle
Mark (_) is displayed on the screen when this
function is available. You can also select this item
from On Screen menu (p. 17).
- Angle Mark is displayed only when the Angle Mark
is set to on (p. 25).
Continued to the next page. -_
t_l_tlll'|l'lll_ffqlt
g
C
6"
TEn
®
CLEAR SEARCH
©©
E_TER SETUP
© @ ©
STATUS SUBTITLE AHGLE AUDIO
©©©©
_YAMAHA
@ Cursor buttons (A/_'/</I_): Moves the focus in
the menu screen.
ENTER: Selects the focused menu/item.
@ TOP MENU I_ | : Displays the top menu
screen if the disc contains a menu. Select the desired
item using A/V/</I_ and ENTER.
®
®
- Specific operations may be different depending on
the disc. Follow the instructions of each menu
screen.
RETURN: Returns to the previous menu or screen,
etc.
Control buttons
_: Stops playback. To stop playback completely,
press this button twice.
| | : Pauses playback.
IIP,_: Plays back contents.
Searches backward/forward. The search speed will
change each time you press the button (search
backward/forward: 5 steps each). Press _ to resume
normal playback.
: Changes the speed of a slide show (slower/
faster: 3 steps).
_tP,t1/_,_ : Skips backward/forward.
- Depending on the disc, this Player resumes playback
from the point that where the Player was previously
stopped. To play back from the beginning, press
twice and then _.
@ POP-UP/MENU I_ | : Displays pop-up
menu. The menu contents displayed vary depending
on the disc. For details on how to see and operate the
pop-up menu, refer to the manual for the disc.
The top menu screen may be displayed by pressing
POP-UP/MENU depending on the DVD.
@ ON SCREEN: Displays On Screen menu (p. 17).
8 En
Loading the batteries in the remote
control
- Change both batteries when the operation range of
the remote control decreases.
- Use AAA, R03, UM-4 batteries.
- Make sure that the polarities are correct. Refer to the
illustration inside the battery compartment.
- Remove the batteries if the remote control is not to
be used for an extended period of time.
- Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
- Do not use different types of batteries (such as
alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the
packaging carefully as these different types of
batteries may have the same shape and color.
- If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them
immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or
letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
- Do not throw away batteries with general house
waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with
your local regulations.
- Keep batteries away from children. If a battery is
accidentally swallowed, contact your doctor
immediately.
- When not planning to use the remote control for long
periods of time, remove the batteries from the
remote control.
- Do not charge or disassemble the supplied batteries.
Approximate operating range of
remote control
Remote control sensor
' 3W ! 30°
6 m (20 ft)
bl;_'l_lt-'It IiI, |1,If I,I_I,Ii f
g
Q.
9En
Connecting to the HDMI terminal
- You can enjoy high quality digital picture and sound through the HDMI terminal.
- Firmly connect an HDMI cable (commercially available) to the HDMI terminals.
- See page 28 lbr information on the audio/video output formats.
- Use HIGH SPEED HDMI cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the back cover).
Caution!
Do not connect the power cable of this Player until all connections are completed.
This Player
To HDMI terminal
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
[]
-<::_ To HDMI input terminal
1
i
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
iHi _iii
- When you use the HDMI Control function,
refer to the "HDMI Control" (p. 24).
- For information on the output mode of HDMI
terminal, refer to the "HDMI" (p. 27).
- When no picture is displayed, refer to
"Troubleshooting" (p. 32).
Connection for the playback
of Blu-ray 3D Discs
To enjoy Blu-ray 3D Discs on this Player, you need
the following equipment and connections:
- You need a TV and an AV receiver (if you
need) that have 3D functionality.
- All the components must be connected with
HDMI cables.
- A Blu-ray Disc should contain 3D images.
- You need to set 3D Output in Display Setting
(p. 26) to Auto.
AV receiver TV
lO En
Connecting to the NETWORK terminal
- PC contents can be played back by connecting this Player to the network.
- You can enjoy a variety of contents with interactive functions by connecting to the internet when playing BD-Live
compatible discs. Refer to page 20 regarding further information on BD-Live functions.
- Firmly connect a network cable (commercially available) to the NETWORK terminal.
- Use only an STP (shielded twisted pair) network cable.
- When using the internet, a broadband internet connection as shown below is required.
- Connect the other connector of the network cable to the hub/broadband router.
- When using a broadband internet connection, a contract with an internet service provider is required. For more
details, contact your nearest internet service provider.
- Refer to the operation manual of the equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may
differ depending on your internet environment.
- Use a network cable/router supporting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
O
o
O
Connecting to the USB connector
- You can connect aUSB memory device for Local Storage to the USB connector on the rear panel (or front panel) of
this Player to save the BD-Live data, or to upgrade the software of this Player.
- Firmly connect a USB memory device (commercially available) to the USB connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not remove the USB memory device or
unplug the power cable while the operations for
BD-Live (p. 20) or software upgrade are being
performed.
- Do not use a USB extension cable when
connecting a USB memory device to the USB
connector of this Player. Using a USB
extension cable may prevent the Player from
performing correctly.
This Player
- Yamaha cannot guarantee that all brands' USB
memory devices will operate with this Player.
USB memory device
(commerciallyavailable)
- To save BD-Live data on
the USB memory device r"
on the front panel, set
Local Storage to Front
USB (p. 24).
J l term na
Networkcable
(commerciallyavailable)
<JToLAN
l terminal
/
Internet Modem Hub or
broadband router
After connecting
- When you set the Network setting manually, refer to "Network" (p. 25).
- To play back the PC contents on your network, refer to "Using network content" (p. 15).
PC
11 E,
Setting with the Initial Wizard/Easy Setup
Initial Wizard/Easy Setup allows you to set language, resolution, and screen aspect ratio easily. Initial Wizard screen is
displayed when you turn this Player on for the first time after purchase. Same setting can be performed from SETUP
menu -+ System -+ Easy Setup.
1 When Easy Setup screen is displayed, press ENTER to
start Easy Setup.
Set the language, resolution, and screen aspect ration
by following the on-screen messages.
- When no picture is displayed after Initial Wizard/
Easy Setup is completed, refer to "Troubleshooting"
(p. 32).
- A warning message concerning 3D video playback
appears when this Player is turned on. Press ENTER
to dismiss the message or CLEAR to disable it
(p. 24).
12 En
HOME and MEDIA menus allow you to browse and play
multi-media files on data discs, USB memory devices and
your network.
- For details on playable discs and formats, see page 3.
Playing back photo/music/video
Basic operation
_I/_/A/V: Moves the focus.
_1: Returns to the parent folder.
HOME: Moves to/exits HOME menu screen.
ENTER: Confirms the folder/file.
Common operations for playing back
files in a selected folder
Example: Selecting a movie file on a USB memory
device
- Stop the playback of the video before you move to
MEDIA menu screen.
Press HOME to move to HOME menu screen.
"u
O
Icons on the top of MEDIA menu
O: Plays back the disc on the tray, or displays contents
in the data disc.
: Displays contents in the USB memory device
connected to the USB connector.
: Searches for a DLNA (p. 15) server on the network.
__: Displays contents on the connected DLNA server.
- The HOME menu screen may differ depending on
the model.
Press _I/_/A/V to select MEDIA, then press ENTER.
MEDIA screen appears.
I
3 Select the item which contains the file you want to play
back, then press ENTER.
13 En
4 Select the Photo, Music, Video or AVCHD folder you
want to play back, then press ENTER.
To return to the parent folder, press _ or select mt_.
- To enjoy slide show with music, press HOME to
return to the HOME menu screen while music is
played back, and select photo file.
- Note that the only the file type selected on this step
will be displayed in the following step. For example,
if you selected Photo folder in this step, only photo
files are displayed alter this step. When you want to
play back other than photo, return to this step and
select file type again.
Select the folder(s) containing the file you want to play
back.
- The displayed file may not be played back
depending on the content.
Operations for viewing photos
While viewing photos, the buttons on the remote control
work as shown below.
: Stops slide show and returns to the file browser.
| |: Pauses a slide show.
_: Plays a slide show.
: Moves to a next photo.
: Moves to a previous photo.
: Makes a slide show faster in 3 steps.
_I_,4: Makes a slide show slower in 3 steps.
I: Inverts a photo.
V: Reflects a photo.
4: Rotates a photo counterclockwise.
_: Rotates a photo clockwise.
ZOOM: Zooms in/out a photo (zoom in/out: 3 steps each).
l/V/_/_: Pans in zoom mode when a photo is larger
than the screen.
DIGEST: Switches to thumbnail mode (p. 7). When
thumbnails are displayed, you can proceed to the next/
previous page with _/_m,_.
Select the file you want to play back, then press
ENTER.
When a video file is selected, playback starts.
When a music file is selected, status screen is displayed
and playback starts.
When a photo file is selected, slide show starts.
14 En
Using network content
This Player is DLNA certified (p. 34). You can manage
photo, music and video contents stored on DLNA servers
on your home network.
Playing back shared contents
1 To play back files on your PC, install a DLNA server
software, such as Windows Media Player 12, and share
files you want to play back.
2 Turn on the PC with DLNA server software installed or
the DLNA device connected to your home network.
3 Press HOME to display HOME menu screen. Then
select MEDIA to move to MEDIA menu. The DLNA
servers connected to the network are listed on the
screen.
- If your DLNA server is not listed, select DLNA
Search to find it.
- Depending on the DLNA server, this Player may
need to be permitted from the server.
- To play the file on the DLNA server, this Player and
the server must be connected to the same access
point.
- The file requirements may not always be compatible.
There may be some restrictions depending on file
features and DLNA sever capability.
4 Select the file you want to play back.
- The playback and operating quality may be affected
by your home network condition.
- The files from removable media such as USB
memory devices or DVD-drive on your media
server, may not be shared properly.
15 En
"o
You can instantly watch the videos that the following network services provide.
- YouTube
- Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account
registration and a paid subscription.
- Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice,
and Yamaha disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences.
- Some content may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in specific languages.
- Yamaha does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particular
period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.
You can watch movies from YouTube over the internet using this Player.
The services may be changed without notice.
1 Press HOME to display HOME menu screen.
- The HOME menu screen may differ depending on
the model.
Press _l/_/,i./V to select YouTube, then press
ENTER.
- To return to the HOME menu screen, press
RETURN.
16 En
This chapter explains playback of commercially available
Blu-ray Discs, DVDs, CDs, and recorded DVD-RW/R
discs.
- For the basic playback operation, see page 6.
On Screen menu
To display On Screen menu, press ON SCREEN. Alter
that, press A/V/</I_ to select an item, then press ENTER
to operate the desired function.
On Screen menu contains following items.
Title _ _ _: Shows the title number being
played back. You can skip to the desired title by selecting
it from this item.
Chapter _ | _: Shows the chapter
number being played back. You can skip to the desired
chapter by selecting it from this item.
Track/File I_ _ _ Fdlr_=_ : Shows
track/file number being played back. You can skip to the
desired track/file by selecting it from this item.
Time _ _ _ _ INl_'q_: Shows the
playback time. Select display type from the following:
- Elapsed playback time of the title, chapter, disc,
track or file
- Remaining playback time of the title, chapter, disc,
track or file
Mode/Play Mode
_ Ik_rl_J===[__ _: Shows current
playback mode. You can select playback mode from the
following:
- Normal: Normal playback.
- Shuffle: Random playback without repetition.
- Random: Random playback with repetition.
- Normal
- Shuffle CH (chapter)
- Shuffle TT (title)
- Shuffle All
- Random CH (chapter)
- Random TT (title)
- Random All
- Normal
- Shuffle F (folder)
- Random F (folder)
Audio _ _ _ : Shows audio language/
signal of a Blu-ray Disc/DVD currently selected. You can
select the desired type of audio.
Angle _ | : Shows the currently-selected angle
number. If the video is recorded with multiple angles, you
can change the angle.
Subtitle _ | lk_N==N!:Shows the currently-
selected subtitle language when the subtitle is provided.
Subtitle Style _ : Shows the currently-selected
subtitle style. This function is available only for Video-file
external subtitle. You can select the desired text style of
subtitle.
Bitrate _ _ _ _ INIINM: Shows
bitrate of the audio/video signal.
Second Video _ : Turns the PIP on/off (p. 6).
Second Audio _: Turns the secondary audio on/off
(p. 6).
Ins Search
| _ _ INII_I: Skips 30 seconds.
Ins Replay
| _ _ INII_'NM: Replays the content
from 10 seconds before.
Slide Show _ :
Shows slide show speed. You can select the slide show
speed from Slow/Medium/Fast.
Transition _: Shows how photo appears on the
screen. You can select the transition type.
"10
¢1
17 En
Status menu
This shows various settings, such as subtitles, angle
settings and the title/chapter/track number currently
played back. To display status menu, press STATUS.
Status menu contains following menus.
Example: Icons when playing a Blu-ray Disc
Example: Icons when playing a music file
@ ® (>
_ (Playback status)
_Mv (Disc type/video file icon)
_(Title number being played): You canjump to
specified title with SEARCH button (p. 7).
_ (Chapter number being played): You can
jump to specified chapter with SEARCH button (p. 7).
_) _ (Elapsed playback time): You can jump to
specified point with SEARCH button (p. 7).
_) _ (Subtitle currently selected): You can change
the subtitle language with SUBTITLE button.
(Z) _(Audio currently selected): You can change the
audio language or format with AUDIO button.
Le_}(Repeat mode): Shows current repeat mode (p. 6).
®
P'- (Playback status)
_(Repeat mode): Shows current repeat mode (p. 6).
[] (Disc type/music file icon)
(Artwork) IIi_L'R_: Displays artwork if the file
contains it.
_ (Track/file number being played): You can
jump to specified track with SEARCH button (p. 7).
(Information) II'_llk'qM:Displays music information
if the file contains them.
(Z) (_ (Elapsed playback time): You can jump to
specified point with SEARCH button (p. 7).
(Progress bar) _: Shows progress status of
current song.
@ @ ® @
_ (Playback status)
[] (Photo file icon)
1_ (File number being displayed)
@ C_(Repeat mode): Shows current repeat mode (p. 6).
@ (Slide show speed)
18 En
Using Bookmark |
This allows you to set Bookmark at the specified point of
the video. After Bookmark is set, you can move to the
point you set using this function. You can set up to 12
Bookmarks.
1 Press MARKER during playing back the movie to set
Bookmark. Bookmark number, and the status are
displayed.
2 After Bookmark is set, press DIGEST to display
Bookmark select bar.
3 Press </l_ to select the Bookmark you want to play
back, then press ENTER.
Press CLEAR to delete the selected Bookmark.
- When playback is finished (e.g., ejecting the disc,
pressing _ twice), Bookmarks are automatically
deleted.
Program play _
This allows you to program playback order of audio disc
tracks or DVD chapters.
Press PROGRAM during playback to display the
PROGRAM window to program playback order.
You can program up to 15 tracks/chapters.
Example: Programming the playback order of CD tracks
1 Press PROGRAM during playback.
iFt,#_rN,HFL__'J,'_:€.,:,_,t.J,
Press ENTER to program playback order.
For audio disc, press A/V to select a desired track then
press ENTER.
For DVD-Video disc, select a desired title (shown as
TT) and chapter (shown as CH) instead of a track.
To clear a set track, select the track you want to clear,
then press CLEAR.
Press RETURNto cancel the Program play.
3 Alter programming is finished, press _ to set and
start program playback.
4 To cancel program play, stop playback completely by
pressing _ twice.
Using Search
This allows you to jump to the specified point during
playback.
1 Press SEARCH during playback. Status bar appears.
2 Press A/V/</I_ to select one of the item below, then
press ENTER.
Igl]!lIlia! :
- Title number (shown as _)
- Chapter number (shown as _ )
- Elapsed title time (shown as @,T)
-- Elapsed chapter time (shown as @H )
IN!l:
- Track number (shown as _)
- Elapsed track time (shown as T_K )
-- Elapsed disc time (shown as _)
_ _-_j_:
- File number (shown as _ )
- Elapsed file time (shown as (_))
- File number (shown as _ )
3 Press A/V or number buttons to set/adjust the value of
the focused item, and press ENTER to jump to the
specified point.
4 To close the status bar, press STATUS.
"o
O
19 En
Enjoying BONUSVIEW TM and BD-
Live TM
This Player supports BONUSVIEW (p. 34) (BD-ROM
Profile 1 Version 1.1 ) and BD-Live (p. 34) (BD-ROM
Profile 2) playback functions.
- Functions and playback method vary depending on
the disc. See the guidance on the disc or the supplied
user's manual.
Using Picture in Picture function
(secondary audio/video playback)
BD-Video that includes secondary audio and video
compatible with Picture in Picture can be played back
with secondary audio and video simultaneously as a small
video in the corner.
Primary video Secondary video
1.
2.
Using the feature of BD-Live TM
Set the Network setting (p. 25).
Connect the USB memory device
to this Player (p. 11).
BD-Live data is saved in a USB memory device
connected to this Player. To enjoy these functions,
connect a USB memory device supporting USB 2.0
High Speed (480 Mbit/s) to the USB connector that
you select on Local Storage (p. 24). The default
setting is the USB connector on the rear panel.
BUDA folder is created automatically in the USB
memory device when necessary.
If there is insufficient storage space, the data will not
be copied/downloaded. Delete unneeded data or use
a new USB memory device.
Some time may be required for the data to load
(read/write).
While PiP [__([-_)) or
Mark Secondary
Audio Mark ( is displayed, press
PIP to turn the Picture in Picture
function on/off.
- To listen to secondary audio, make sure that the
Audio Output setting (HDMI) is set to PCM or
Reencode (p. 27).
- Depending on the disc, to listen to secondary audio,
you may need to set secondary audio to on Dom the
top menu of the disc (p. 8).
- The secondary audio and video for Picture in Picture
may automatically play back and be removed
depending on the content. Also, playable areas may
be restricted.
Yamaha cannot guarantee that all brands' USB
memory devices will operate with this Player.
Do not use a USB extension cable when connecting
a USB memory device to the USB connector of the
Player. Using a USB extension cable may prevent
the Player from performing correctly.
3. Play back the disc.
4.
Run BD-Live according to the
instructions on the disc.
- Regarding playback method of BD-Live contents,
etc., perform the operations in accordance with the
instructions in the Blu-ray Disc manual.
- To enjoy BD-Live functions, perform the network
connection (p. 11) and Network settings (p. 25).
- Refer to "BD-Live Connection" (p. 25) regarding the
setup to restrict access to BD-Live contents.
- The time required to download the provided
programs into the USB memory device connected to
this Player varies depending on the internet
connection speeds and the data volume of the
programs.
- BD-Live programs provided through the internet
may not be able to display the connection depending
on the status (upgrading) of the provider. In such
cases, take out the disc and try again.
- If the BD-Live screen does not appear for a while
after you select the BD-Live function in the Blu-ray
Disc menu, the USB memory device may not have
enough free space. In such cases, eject the disc from
the Player, and then erase the data in the USB
memory device using the "Format" menu in the
"Local Storage" (p. 24).
20 En
The SETUP menu enables various audio/visual settings and
Menu/Submenu Item
System
General Setting
Screen Saver
Disc Auto Playback
HDMI Control
Load Default 24
Upgrade 24
Easy Setup 24
Local Storage
24
3D Playback 24
Message
Language OSD 24
Menu 24
Audio 24
Subtitle 24
Playback Angle Mark 25
PiP Mark 25
Secondary Audio 25
Mark
Last Memory 25
Security Change Password 25
Parental Control 25
Country Code 25
Network lnternet Connection 25
Information 25
Connection Test 25
IP Setting 25
BD-Live 25
Connection
DLNA 25
Proxy Setting 25
adjustments for functions using the remote control unit.
Function Page
Sets screen saver on/off. 24
Sets this Player to starl disc playback automatically. 24
Sets this Player to receive control signal from the remote
24
control of your TV/AV receiver.
Resets all settings to the default setting except Security
setting.
Perlbrms upgrade of this Player.
Sets language, resolution, screen aspect ratio.
Displays status of Local Storage (p. 24), l'ormats Local
Storage and selects the front/rear USB connector for Local
Storage.
Displays a warning message concerning 3D video playback
when this Player is turned on.
Selects the language for On Screen Display.
Prioritizes the language lk)r disc menu.
Prioritizes the language lk)r audio.
Prioritizes the language lk)r subtitle.
Sets to display the Angle Mark when Blu-ray Disc/DVD with
multiple angles is played back.
Sets to display the PIP Mark when Blu-ray Disc/DVD with
Picture in Picture is played back.
Sets to display the Secondary Audio Mark when Blu-ray
Disc/DVD with secondary audio is played back.
Sets this Player to remember the last playback position of a
disc when it is set to standby mode or the disc tray is opened.
Changes password lbr Parental Control and Country Code.
Sets the Parental Control depending on the disc content.
Sets your Country Code.
Sets the internet connection to Enable/Disable.
Displays network information screen.
Perlk)rms the network connection test.
Sets the IP setting to Auto/Manuah
Sets the BD-Live connection to Permitted/Partial Permitted/
Prohibited.
Sets the DLNA to Enable/Disable.
Sets the proxy setting.
ffl
21 En
Menu/Submenu
TV
Display Setting
Audio Setting
System
Information
Item
3D Output
TV Screen
Vide() Out Select
TV System
Color Space
HDMI Deep Color
HDMI 1080p 24Hz
Lip Sync
Video Process
Audio Output
Vide() Mode
Color Adjust
Noise Reduction
De-imerlacing
Mode
HDMI
DRC
Function Page
Selects 3D or 2D videos. 26
Sets the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV, and adjust 26
the vide() output.
Selects the resolution of vide() output. 26
Selects the TV System from NTSC/PAL/Multi. 26
Selects Color Space from YCbCr 4:4:4/YCbCr 4:2:2/Full
26
RGB/RGB.
Selects HDMI Deep Color from 30 bits/36 bits/48 bits!Off. 26
Sets HDMI 1080p 24Hz to auto/off. 27
Adjusts the lag between vide() and audio, such as when the
27
mouth movement is out of sync with the voice.
Adjusts the visual image. 27
Adjusts Brightness/Saturation/Hue for each color. 27
Sets the level of Noise Reduction. 27
Sets how to detect the video signal. 27
27
Selects the output mode of HDMI terminal I'rom Bitstream/
PCM/Reencode/Off.
Sets the DRC (Dynamic Range Compression).
Displays software version and MAC address (p. 35).
27
27
22 En
Example of SETUP menu
operation
You need to call up the SETUP menu screen to perform
settings for this Player. The following is the explanation
for basic operations of the SETUP menu.
.
q_Lt'/_rr_,_rr
Enter password.
Enter your password with number buttons.
- The default password is 0000.
- You cannot move to the next setting screen until
you have input the correct password.
- To change the password, refer to "Change
Password" (p. 25).
(,Q
(/)
Example: Setting Parental Control
- Some items cannot be set during playback. In this
case, press _ twice to stop playback completely
before setting.
.
Display the SETUP menu screen.
Press SETUP to display the SETUP menu screen.
Press _111_to select General Setting, then press
ENTER or T.
2. Select a Submenu.
Press A/V to select Security, then press ENTER or
cursor _.
3. Select a menu item.
Press A/V to select Parental Control, then press
ENTERor cursor l_.
.
.
Select a next item.
Press A/V to select the Parental Control Level for
Blu-ray Disc/DVD, then press ENTER.
Exit the menu screen.
Press _1to return to the previous menu.
23 En
W-'g=Ltml_rr_,vr_o
General Setting
The default settings are marked with ..... .
System
Screen Saver
You can set the screen saver to on/off.
When set to on, this Player will switch to screen saver
mode if there is no operation for 3 minutes. After that, this
Player will turn to standby mode when there is no
operation for 27 minutes.
On*, Off
Disc Auto Playback
You can set Disc Auto Playback to on/off. When set to on,
a disc will play back automatically after loading.
On*, Off
HDMI Control
You can set the Player to receive control signal from a
TV/AV receiver compatible with the HDMI Control
function via an HDMI cable (p. 10).
On, Off*
Using HDMI Control function
Using the HDMI Control function, you can interactively
operate this Player with your TV (HDMI Control
function supported).
When you connect this Player to the TV compatible with
the HDMI Control function using an HDMI cable and
set HDMI Control in the SETUP menu to on (p. 24), you
can perform the function listed below.
• Automatic input select function
When you start playback of this Player, the input
selector of the TV (and an AV receiver if this Player is
connected to the TV via the AV receiver) is switched
to this Player automatically. TV Power is turned on
automatically depending on the TV.
Automatic power off function
When you turn off the TV while this Player is in stop
mode and the SETUP menu screen is not displayed,
the power of this Player is also turned off
automatically.
- HDMI Control function may not work properly
depending on the TV.
- Functions other than ones shown above may work
depending on the TV or AV receiver.
- In order to make the HDMI Control function
available, set up settings for the HDMI Control
function on ALL components (this Player, TV,
and AV receiver). Certain operation may also be
required.
- Each function may be set independently to
activate/deactivate depending on the TV.
- Refer to the operation manuals supplied with the
TV and/or AV receiver for details regarding setup.
- When set to on, power consumption during
standby mode increases due to HDMI Control
function.
Load Default
You can reset all settings of this Player to default setting
except Security setting (p. 25). For details on default
settings, see pages 21-27.
Upgrade
You can upgrade the software manually from USB
Storage or Network. For details on software upgrade, refer
to "Software upgrade" (p. 30).
Easy Setup
You can perform Easy Setup (p. 12).
Local Storage
You can display Local Storage information, format Local
Storage, and select Front USB/Rear USB to save the BD-
Live data.
To format (empty) the "BUDA" folder in the USB
memory device, select Information and press ENTER
when "Format" is focused on the screen.
Front USB, Rear USB*
- Local Storage is used as an auxiliary memory when
Blu-ray Disc is played back.
3D Playback Message
You can turn on or off a warning message concerning 3D
video playback that appears on the TV when this Player is
turned on.
On*, Off
Language
OSD
You can select the language for On Screen Display which
is the messages or menu displayed on the screen such as
SETUP menu.
English, Frangais, Espaffol, Deutsch, Italiano, Svenska,
Nederlandse, PyccKW_, _
Menu
You can prioritize the hmguage for disc menu.
English, Fran_ais, ga2;_, Espaffol, Deutsch, Italiano,
Nederlandse, Portuguese, Danish, Svenska, Finnish,
Norwegian, PyccK[4_, Korean, Japanese, More
Audio
You can prioritize the audio language for Blu-ray Disc/
DVD playback. For details on setting items, see "Menu"
(p. 24).
Subtitle
You can prioritize the hmguage for Subtitle.
English,Fran_:ais,ga_, Espaffol, Deutsch, Itaiiano,
Nederlandse,Portuguese, Danish, Svenska, Finnish,
Norwegian, PyccK[4E, Korean, Japanese, More, Off
(The default settings in [Language] differ dependingon
yourmodel.)
24 En
4_Ltq_rr_,_rr
Playback
Angle Mark
You can set to display the Angle Mark (_) when
Blu-ray Disc/DVD with multiple angles is played back.
On*,Off
PIP Mark
You can set to display the PIP Mark ([-_) when Blu-ray
Disc with picture in picture (p. 20) is played back.
On*,Off
Secondary Audio Mark
You can set to display the Secondary Audio Mark (r_)
when Blu-ray Disc with secondary audio is played back.
On*,Off
Last Memory
You can set whether this Player remembers the last
playback position of a disc when it is set to standby mode
or the disc tray is opened.
On*,Off
- Some discs are not compatible with this function.
Security
Change Password
You can set the password for changing the Parental
Control Level and Country Code. Refer to "Parental
Control" (p. 25) and "Country Code" (p. 25).
- The default password is 0000.
- If you forget the password, refer to
"Troubleshooting" (p. 31 ) and set all the Security
settings to their default settings.
Parental Control
In some Blu-ray Discs/DVDs, a control level for disc
viewing is set depending on the age of the viewer. You
can set the Parental Control shown on the screen
depending on the disc content.
The password (see "Change Password" on p. 25) needs to
be entered before the Parental Control Levels is set.
After you set the Parental Control, when you play back a
disc with level higher than current Parental Control Level,
or you want to change the Parental Control Level, a dialog
box will pop up to ask you to enter the password.
Off*, 1-8
Country Code
You can set the Country Code you live in. The password
(see "Change Password" on p. 25) needs to be entered
before the Country Code is set. This setting may be used
for rating of Parental Control and disc playback.
Network
Internet Connection
Set this item to Enable when you use BD-Live (p.20), DLNA
(p. 15), software upgrade from the network (p. 30), and the
other network functions.
Enable*, Disable
Information
You can display network information screen. On this
screen, you can view the information of Interface
(Ethernet), Address Type, IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Default Gateway, and DNS.
Connection Test
You can perform an internet connection test. It the test is
failed, please check "IP Setting" (p. 25) and perform the
test again.
IP Setting
You can configure the network settings.
Auto* Select to automatically configure the network
settings of this Player with the DHCP server.
Manual Select to configure the network settings (IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and DNS) manually.
- Numeric keys Enters characters.
- <1_ Moves the highlight.
- CLEAR Deletes a character.
- ENTER Saves the settings and exits from
the menu.
BD-Live Connection
You can set access restriction to BD-Live contents.
Permitted
Partial
Permitted*
Prohibited
Allows all BD-Live discs to connect the network.
Allows only discs with owner certil'ication.
Prohibits all BD-Live discs to connect the network.
DLNA
You can set the DLNA (p. 34) to Enable/Disable. When
you do not use the DLNA function, set to Disable.
Enable*, Disable
Proxy Setting
You can set Proxy Setting. Set to Disable for normal use.
Set to Enable to set the proxy setting.
Enable Enables proxy host and proxy port setting.
Disable* Sets proxy server to disable. Select this item when
proxy server is not used.
Proxy Host Sets proxy host.
Proxy Port Sets proxy port.
if)
{,Q
25 En
W-'1_Ltq_rrm_o
Display Setting
The default settings are marked with ..... .
TV
3D Output
You can select 3D or 2D video output from this Player.
Auto* This Player automatically selects 3D or 2D videos.
Off This Player always selects 2D videos.
- Even if you set "3D Output" to "Auto" and play
back a Blu-ray 3D Disc, this Player selects 2D
images depending on the connection and the setting
of TV, etc (p. 10).
TV Screen
You can set the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV,
and adjust the video output.
If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a
new one) and the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV
changes, you will have to change the TV Screen setting.
16:9 Full Select this when this Player is connected to a TV
with a 16:9 screen. When a 4:3 aspect ratio video is
played back, the video is displayed as shown below.
16:9 Normal* Select this when this Player is connected to a TV
with a 16:9 screen. When a 4:3 aspect ratio video is
played back, the video is displayed as shown below.
4:3 Pan Scan Select this when this Player is connected to a TV
with a 4:3 screen. When a 16:9 aspect ratio video is
played back, the video is displayed as shown below.
4:3 Letter Box Select this when this Player is connected to a TV
with a 4:3 screen. When a 16:9 aspect ratio video is
played back, the video is displayed as shown below.
Original On 16:9 (wide screen) TV
image size 16:9 Full 16:9 Normal
I
4:3
Original
image size
16:9
On 4:3 TV
4:3 Pan Scan 4:3 Letter Box
Video Out Select
You can select the video output resolution from Auto,
480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, and 1080p.
When set to Auto, resolution is set to the maximum
resolution according to the connected TV.
For more details on output formats, refer to "About the
video output formats" (p. 29).
Auto*, 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p
- To output HD audio (Dolby TrueHD or DTS-HD
Master Audio) from HDMI terminal, set Video Out
Select to Auto or more than 720p.
TV System
You can select TV System from PAL, NTSC and Multi.
Set the same TV System as your TV set. For more details
on output formats, refer to "About the video output
formats" (p. 29).
NTSC, PAL, Multi
(The default setting differs depending on your model.)
Color Space
You can select the Color Space (p. 34) output from
HDMI. This function is available when this Player is
connected with an HDMI cable.
YCbCr 4:4:4* Sets Coh)r Space to YCbCr 4:4:4.
YCbCr 4:2:2 Sets Coh)r Space to YCbCr 4:2:2.
Full RGB When RGB is set and white and black on the screen
are too faint, select this item. This setting is effective
when a connected component supports RGB 0 255
range.
RGB Outputs video signal at normal signal range.
- This function is only available on TVs that support
this function.
HDMI Deep Color
When your TV and/or AV receiver is compatible with
Deep Color (p, 34), set this item according to your TV/AV
receiver, This function is available when this Player is
connected with an HDMI cable,
30 bits, 36 bits, 48 bits, Off*
26 En
HDMI 1080p 24Hz
This outputs the BD-Video encoded in 24Hz frame rate in
HDMI 1080p 24Hz. Smoother video playback may be
available with this function. This function is available
when your TV/AV receiver support this function, and this
Player is connected with an HDMI cable. For more details
on output formats, refer to "About the video output
formats" (p. 29).
Auto*, Off
q_LIq_rr_,_rr
Noise Reduction
You can set the Noise Reduction to a level of 0 to 3.0 is
off, and 3 is the maximum level.
g, 1,2", 3
De-interlacing Mode
You can select how to detect the video signal. Set to Auto
lZ)rnormal use. When horizontal stripping noise appears
on the screen, set this to Film/Video to remove the noise.
Auto*, Film, Video
- This setting is disabled when output resolution is
other than 1080p.
Lip Sync
You can set/adjust the Lip Sync (p. 35) function.
Auto* This Player adjusts the Lip Sync function
automatically.
Manual You can adjust the Lip Sync function manually. You
can set the delay of the audio for 2D and 3D contents
independently.
2D
3D
off
This Player does not adjust the Lip Sync l'unction.
Video Process
Video Mode
You can select Vide() Mode below.
Standard* The image is most natural and well-balanced. This
mode suits for normal use.
Vivid The image is more vivid and sharp.
Cinema The image suits for watching movie in dark room.
Custom You can adjust the visual image manually. Press
A/V to select the parameter, then press _1/_ to
adjust the figure.
Brightness
Adjusts the overall brightness of the image.
Saturation
Adjusts the richness of the coh)r in the projected
image.
Hue
Adjusts the tint of the projected image.
Contrast
Adjusts the brightareas (white lex,cls) intheimage.
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness of objects in the ',.ideo.
CTI
Smoothes out the edges of color images. Color
images am rendered more distinct.
The defaultsettingsare0.
Color Adjust
You can adjust Brightness/Saturation/Hue for each color
(Red/Green/Blue/Yenow/Cyan/Magenta). To use this
function, set Video Mode to Custom. For details on the
setting items, see "Video Mode" (p. 27).
The default settings are 0.
Audio Setting
The default settings are marked with .....
Audio Output
HDMI
You can select the output mode of HDMI terminal. For more
details on output formats, refer to "About the audio output
formats" (p. 28).
Bitstream*, PCM, Reencode, Off
- To output HD audio (Dolby TrueHD or DTS-HD
Master Audio) from HDMI terminal, set Video Out
Select to Auto or more than 720p (p. 26).
DRC
You can set the DRC (Dynamic Range Compression)
(p. 34) to on/off/Auto. When set to Auto, DRC is
automatically turned on for a source with DRC
information in Dolby TrueHD format. DRC makes the
strong sound such as plosive sound lower, and
conversations more audible. It is useful when you watch
movies in the night.
Off, On, Auto*
System Information
Software version and MAC address (p. 35) are displayed.
(/1
I,Q
27 En
About the audio output formats
PCM 2ch
PCM 5.1ch
PCM 7.1ch
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS
DTS HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
with SA* or BCS**
without SA* or BCS**
with SA* or BCS**
without SA* or BCS**
with SA* or BCS**
without SA* or BCS**
with SA* or BCS*"
without SA" or BCS"*
with SA* or BCS*"
without SA" or BCS"*
with SA* or BCS*"
without SA" or BCS"*
with SA* or BCS*"
without SA" or BCS"*
with SA* or BCS*"
without SA" or BCS"*
with SA* or BCS*"
without SA" or BCS"*
PCM 2ch
PCM 5.1ch
PCM 7.1ch
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS
DTS HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
PCM 2ch
PCM 5.1ch
PCM 7.1ch
PCM up to 5.1ch
PCM up to 7.1ch
PCM up to 7.1ch
PCM up to 5.1ch
PCM up to 5.1ch
(Core decode)
PCM up to 5.1ch
(Core decode)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital
Dolby TrueHD
DTS
DTS
DTS HD High Resolution
DTS
DTS-HD Master Audio
* "SA" is a Secondary Audio.
** "BCS" is a button click sound, the sound effect for pop-up menus, etc.
- When HDMI is set to Bitstream, secondary audio is not output. (p. 27)
- To output HD audio (Dolby TrueHD or DTS-HD Master Audio) from HDMI terminal, set Video Out Select to
Auto or more than 720p (p. 26).
28 En
About the video output formats
When TV System is set to NTSC
-_Ltq_rr_qrr
HDMI
BD-Video with
1080p/24 Hz
contL'nt
Others
* 1, * 2
480i
720p 60 Hz
1080i 60 Hz
i,lol-l-
1080p 241
60 Hz *2
1080p 60 Hz
When TV System is set to PAL
HDMI
BD-Video with
1080p/24 Hz
contL'nt
Others
* 1, * 2
576i
720p 50 Hz
1080i 50 Hz
| ,lol-i -
1080p 24/
50 Hz *2
10g0p 50 Hz
*1 Resolution is set to the maximum resolution supported by the connected TV. For example, when the maximum
resolution supported by the connected TV is 1080p, the resolution will be set to 1080p.
*2 If the source is 1080p 24 Hz content, and the connected TV supports 1080p 24 Hz content output, 1080p 24 Hz will
be output instead of 1080p 50160 Hz when resolution is set to Auto or 1080p, and Auto is set for HDMI 1080p 24Hz
(p. 27) in Display Setting.
When TV System is set to Multi
When TV System is set to Multi, vide() signal is output at the same frequency as the source. Refer to the tables above for
details on the frequency setting of the TV and resolution of the output video signal.
(,Q
- HDMI 1080p 24Hz setting is disabled when output resolution is other than 1080p.
- When TV System is set to NTSC and video source is not 60 Hz, the video output signal is converted to 60 Hz.
- When TV System is set to PAL and video source is not 50 Hz, the video output signal is converted to 50 Hz.
29 En
Some of the newly released Blu-ray Discs cannot be played back unless you upgrade this Player software to the latest
version. We recommend upgrading the software of this Player with software upgrade so that this Player is operated based
on the latest software.
To check for the availability of a software upgrade, visit
http://download.yamaha.com/
1.
.
- Do not remove the USB memory device, set this Player to standby mode or unplug the power cable/LAN cable
while the software upgrade is being performed.
Upgrading the software
Prepare for the software upgrade.
When you upgrade the software from USB Storage:
@ Save the upgrade file package to the appropriate
folder on the USB memory device. For more
details, refer to the procedure document attached
with the upgrade file package.
@ Connect the USB memory device.
Skip step 2.
When you upgrade the software from Network:
Confirm that this Player is connected to the
network.
3. Upgrade the software by following
the on-screen messages.
Upgrade is completed. The system will be reset.
Select the upgrade method and
start upgrade from SETUP menu.
@ Press SETUP to display SETUP menu screen.
@ Select General Setting -+ System -+ Upgrade.
@ Select the item which contains the upgrade file
package from USB Storage/Network.
The system will search for upgrade file package.
30 En
Refer to the table below when this Player does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this Player, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest
authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
Power
Problem Possible causes and solutions
No power. Connect the AC pm_er cable properly.
Press IQ)on the front panel to turn on the power.
The Player power is turnedoff. The power will be automatically turned (tit after 30 continuous minutes of inactivity (no
playback).
Basic operation
Problem Possible causes and solutions
The remote control does not work. Use the remote control within its operating range. (p. 9)
Replace the batteries. (p. 9)
Buttons do not work. Press and hold IQ)on the front panel for more than 5 seconds, and release to reset this
Player.
To completely reset this Player, unplug the power cable from the AC outlet for 10
seconds or more, plug the power cable to the AC outlet again, and then turn on this
Player.
Password is forgotten. Press and hold Imi and lira on the front panel simultaneously when no disc is inserted
and playback is stopped to set all the settings including Security settings (p. 25) of this
Player to their default settings. After the power is turned off automatically, press (J) to
turn on the power again.
Disc playback
Problem Possible causes and solutions
The Player cannot play a disc.
Video stops.
The Player makes a snapping sound
when starting playback or loading a
disc.
Take out the disc and clean it. (p. 4)
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up). (p. 4)
Use a disc supported by the Player. (p. 3)
Remove the disc and then check whether the Player supports the disc or not. (p. 3)
Check the region code. (p. 3)
Check whether the disc is defective by trying another disc.
The CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW/R DL, and DVD-R/RW/R DL must be finalized. (p. 3)
The Player will stop if it senses shock or vibration.
These sounds are not malfunctions of the Player but are normal operating conditions.
Q.
Q.
31 En
Picture
Problem Possible causes and solutions
No picture. Make surc that the HDMI cable is connected correctly. (p. 10)
Make sure that the connected TV or the AV receiver is set to the correct input. (p. 10)
With no disc inserled, or playback stopped, press and hold _,_ and m on the front
panel simultaneously to set video resolution to the default value.
If a picture is still not output, press and hold m on the front panel for approximately 5
seconds to switch NTSC/PAL.
Screen freezes and operation buttons Press m, then restart playback.
do not work. Turn off the power aud turn on the power again.
Press and hold IQ)on the front panel l'or more than 5 seconds, and release to reset this
Player.
Video is not output with the desired Set to the desired resolution. (p. 26)
resolution.
Wide-screen video appears vertically Change the aspect ratio of your TV. (p. 26)
stretched, or black bands appear at the
top and bottom of the screen. Or 4:3
video appears horizontally stretched.
Square noise (mosaic) appears on the Blocks in images may be visible in scenes vdth rapid movement duc to the
screen, characteristics of digital image compression technology.
Audio is not output, or images are not The audio may not be output or the images may not be played back properly for some
played back properly, discs in which copyright-protected contents are recorded.
Sound
Problem Possible causes and solutions
No sound, or sound is distorted. Check that the HDMI cable is connected correctly. (p. 10)
Turn the volume of TV or AV receiver up.
There is no sound during still mode, fast forward, and fast rcverse. (p. 8)
Audio may not be output depending on the audio recording status, such as when audio
other than an audio signal or non-standard audio is recorded for the audio content. (p. 3)
Left and right channels of audio are Check the HDM] connection. (p. 10)
reversed, or sound comes out of only
one side.
Audio is not output, or images are not The audio m_y not be output or the images may not bc played back properly for some
played back properly, discs in which copyright-protected contents are recorded.
Cannot hear the sound of PiP Set HDMI to PCM/Reencode. (p. 27)
(secondary audio). To hear secondary audio, press 2ND AUDIO. (p. 6)
Depending on the disc, you may need to set secondary audio on the top menu of the
disc. (p. 8)
32 En
Network
Problem Possible causes and solutions
Cannot connect to the Internet.
Cannot download BD-Live contents.
Cannot detect the DLNA server.
Connect the Network cable properly.
Turn on the connected equipment, such as broadband router or modem.
Connect the broadband router and/or modem properly.
Set the proper value(s) in the network setting. Check "Network". (p. 25)
Connect the Network cable properly. (p. 11)
Connect USB memory device properly. Check that the USB memory device is
connected to the USB connector of this Player. (p. 11)
Check if the Blu-ray Disc supports BD-Live.
Check the setting for "Internet Connection". (p. 25)
Connect the USB memory device formatted in FATI 6, FAT32, or NTFS.
It is recommended to connect the USB memory device with at least 2 GB of free space.
If there is not enough free space, format the USB memory device. (p. 24)
Rel)r to the supplied user's manual of the disc or consult the disc manufacturer.
Connect the network cable properly.
Turn on the connected equipment, such as broadband muter or the server.
Confirm the Player and the server are connected to the same access point.
Set the proper value(s) in the network setting. Check "Network". (p. 25)
Depending on the DLNA server, the Player may need to be permitted from the server.
Depending on the DLNA server, it needs to change a firewall setting.
Make sure the file is playable. (p. 3)
Check your DLNA server's setting.
The playback and operating quality may be afl'ccted by your home network condition.
Cannot play the file on the home
network server.
Messages on the screen
- The following messages appear on the TV screen in case the disc you tried to play back is not appropriate or the
operation is not correct.
Error message Possible causes and solutions
Unsupported File The file is not supported with this Player. See "Types or" discs/t'ilcs that can bc used with this Player"
(p. 3).
Wrong region code! The disc is an incompatible region code. See "Region management information t_)r Blu-ray Disc/
DVD videos" (p. 3).
Network has FAILED. This Player cannot be connected to the network. Check connection (p. l 1) and Network setting (p. 25).
Network is OK, proxy has This Player cannot be connected to the proxy server. See "Proxy Setting" (p. 25).
FAILED.
BD-Live connection is BD-Live connection is prohibited. See "BD-Lix, e Connection" (p. 25).
prohibited in SETUP menu.
Upgrade has failed for some Upgrade is t'ailed. Check it"the upgrade file is corrupted or unreadable.
reason!
1>
Q.
Q.
6"
=_
6"
33 En
AVCHD
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition
video cameras that can be used to record and play high-
resolution HD images.
BD-Live 1M
BD-Live is a Blu-ray Disc standard that utilizes a
network connection, enabling this Player to go online to
download promotional videos and other data.
BDMV
BDMV (Blu-ray Disc Movie) refers to one of the
application formats used for BD-ROM which is one of
the Blu-ray Disc specifications. BDMV is a recording
format equivalent to DVD-Video of the DVD
specification.
Blu-ray 3D 1M
Blu-ray 3D enables you to view full high definition 3D
images.
BONUSVIEW lr,1
BONUSVIEW compatible discs let you simultaneously
enjoy video sub-channel for two screens, audio sub-
channel and sub-titles. A small screen appears within
the main screen during playback (Picture in Picture).
Color Space
Color Space is a color range that can be represented.
RGB is a color space based on the RGB color model
(red, green and blue) and is typically used for PC
monitors. YCbCr is a color space based on a luminance
signal (Y) and two color difference signals (Cb and Cr).
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in
displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions
of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows
HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to
billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding
for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations
between colors. The increased contrast ratio can
represent many times more shades of gray between
black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number
of available colors within the boundaries defined by the
RGB or YCbCr color space.
DLNA
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) provides easy
sharing of digital media through network in the home,
and you can enjoy digital contents stored on your
DLNA-server-software-installed PC or other DLNA
compatible device with your TV via this Player. To
connect this Player to your DLNA servers, some
settings for the DLNA server or device are required. For
details, refer to your DLNA server software or DLNA
device.
Dolby Digital
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.
that gives movie theater ambience to audio output when
the product is connected to a Dolby Digital processor or
amplifier.
Dolby Digital Plus
A sound system developed as an extension to Dolby
Digital. This audio coding technology supports 7.1
multi-channel surround sound.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a lossless coding technology that
supports up to 8 channels of multi-channel surround
sound for the next generation optical discs. The
reproduced sound is true to the original source bit-for-
bit.
DRC (Dynamic Range Control)
DRC lets you adjust the range between the loudest and
softest sounds (dynamic range) for playback at average
volume. Use this when it is hard to hear dialog, or
during times when playback may disturb neighbors.
DTS
This is a digital sound system developed by DTS, Inc.
for use in cinemas.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a new technology
developed for the next generation high definition optical
disc format.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio compression
technology developed for the next generation high
definition optical disc format.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is an open file
format for lossless audio data compression. While
inferior in compression rate to other lossy compressed
audio formats, it can often provide higher audio quality.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an
interface that supports both video and audio on a single
digital connection. The HDMI connection carries
standard to high definition video signals and multi-
channel audio signals to AV components such as HDMI
equipped TVs, in digital form without degradation.
Letterbox (LB 4:3)
A screen size with black bars on the top and bottom of
the image to allow viewing of wide-screen (16:9)
material on a connected 4:3 TV.
Linear PCM Sound
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio
CDs and on some DVD and Blu-ray Discs. The sound
on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits.
(Sound is recorded between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96
kHz with 24 bits on DVD discs and between 48 kHz
with 16 bits and 192 kHz with 24 bits on Blu-ray Discs.)
34 En
Lip Sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a
technical term that involves both a problem and a
capability of maintaining audio and video signals
synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex
end-user adjustments, HDMI incorporates an automatic
audio and video syncing capability that allows devices
to perform this synchronization automatically and
accurately without user interaction.
Mac address
The Mac address is a unique value assigned to a network
device for identification purposes.
Pan Scan (PS 4:3)
A screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow
viewing of wide-screen (16:9) material on a connected
4:3 TV.
General
Power supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. AC 110 240 V, 61)Hz
[Central and South America model] ................. AC 110 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................... AC 110-240 V 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia model] .......................... AC 110-240 V 50 Hz
[China model] ......................................................... AC 110 240 V 51)Hz
[Asia model] ...................................................... AC 110-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Korea model] ........................................................ AC 110 240 V, 6(1Hz
Power consumption (Normal) .............................................................. 18 W
Power consumption (Standby) ................................................. (1.5W or less
Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................................. 435 x 51) x 202 mm
(17-118 x 2 x 8 in)
Weight .................................................................................. 2.0 kg (4.4 lbs.)
_ H--i_-#fit
Subtitles
These are the lines of text appearing at the bottom of the
screen which translate or transcribe the dialog. They are
recorded on many DVDs and Blu-ray Discs.
x.v.Color
x.v.Color reproduces a greater range of color than
before, showing ahnost all of the colors that the human
eye can detect.
Input/output
HDMI omput .............................................................. Type A connector x 1
480i/576i/480p/576p/720p/1080i/1080p/1080p @24Hz,
Deep Cnlnr, x.v. Cnlor support
USB ............................................................................ Type A connector x 2
Other equipment ........................................................................ Ethernet × 1
Specificalinns are subject to change without notice.
1>
O.
O.
m,
6"
--3"
6"
/
35 En
Copyright
- Audio-visual material may consist of copyrighted
works which must not be recorded without the
authority of the owner of the copyright. Refer to
relevant laws in your country.
- Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
- Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software. <) DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
- "Blu-ray Disc "rw', "Blu-ray "r_p',"Blu-ray 3D"r_p',
"BD-Live r_p', "BONUSVIEW r_p', and the logos are
trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
- _is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
- "HDMI," the "HDMI" logo and "High-Definition
Multimedia Interface" are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
- "x.v.Color" and "x.v.Color" logo are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
- "AVCHD" and the "AVCHD" logo are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
- Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries.
- This product is licensed under the AVC patent
portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license
for the personal and non-commercial use of a
consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the
AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard ("AVC/VC-I
Video") and/or (ii) decode AVC/VC-I Video that
was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal
and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained
from a video provider licensed to provide AVCIVC-
1Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for
any other use. Additional information may be
obtained from MPEG LA, LLC.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
- Windows Media Player is a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
- YouTube and the YouTube logo are trademarks of
Google. Inc.
- DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/
or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.
- Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation.
Cinavia TM is a Verance Corporation trademark.
Protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and worldwide
patents issued and pending under license from
Verance Corporation. All rights reserved.
36 En
Numerics
2ND AUDIO, reruote control ................ 6
3D Output, SETUP ruenu .................... 26
3D Playback Message, SETUP menu
......................................................... 24
A
A/B, remote control ............................... 7
Angle Mark, SETUP menu .................. 25
Angle, On Screen menu ....................... 17
ANGLE, remote control ........................ 7
Audio file requirement ........................... 3
Audio output formats ........................... 28
Audio Output, SETUP menu ............... 27
Audio Setting, SETUP menu ............... 27
Audio, On Screen menu ....................... 17
AUDIO, remote control ......................... 7
Audio, SETUP menu ........................... 24
B
BD-Live ............................................... 20
BD-Live Connection, SETUP menu .... 25
Bitrate, On Screen menu ...................... 17
Bookmark ............................................. 19
C
Change Password, SETUP menu ......... 25
Chapter, On Screen menu .................... 17
CLEAR, remote control ......................... 7
Color Ac!iust, SETUP menu ................. 27
Color buttons, remote control ................ 7
Color Space, SETUP menu .................. 26
Connection Test, SETUP menu ........... 25
Control buttons, remote control ............. 8
Country Code, SETUP menu ............... 25
Cursor buttons, remote control .............. 8
D
Data disc playback ............................... 13
De-interlacing Mode, SETUP menu .... 27
DIGEST, remote control ........................ 7
Disc Auto Playback, SETUP menu ..... 24
Disc precautions ..................................... 4
Display Setting, SETUP menu ............. 26
DLNA, SETUP menu .......................... 25
DRC, SETUP menu ............................. 27
E
Easy Setup ............................................ 12
Easy Setup, SETUP menu ................... 24
ENTER, remote control ..................... 6, 8
G
General Setting, SETUP menu ............ 24
H
HDMI 1080p 24Hz, SETUP menu ...... 27
HDMI connection ................................ 10
HDMI Control function ....................... 24
HDMI Control, SETUP menu ............. 24
HDMI Deep Color, SETUP menu ....... 26
HDMI, SETUP menu ........................... 27
HOME menu ........................................ 13
HOME, remote control ........................... 7
I
Information, SETUP menu ................... 25
Initial Wizard ....................................... 12
Ins Replay, On Screen menu ................ 17
Ins Search, On Screen menu ................ 17
Iuternet Connection, SETUP menu ...... 25
IP Setting, SETUP menu ...................... 25
L
Language, SETUP menu ...................... 24
Last Memory, SETUP menu ................ 25
Lip Sync, SETUP menu ....................... 27
Load Default, SETUP menu ................ 24
Local Storage, SETUP menu ............... 24
M
MARKER, remote control ..................... 6
MEDIA menu ....................................... 13
Menu, SETUP menu ............................ 24
Mode/Play Mode, On Screen menu ..... 17
N
Network connection ............................. 11
Network, SETUP menu ........................ 25
Noise Reduction, SETUP menu ........... 27
Number buttons, remote control ............ 6
O
On Screen menu ................................... 17
ON SCREEN, remote control ................ 8
OSD, SETUP menu .............................. 24
P
Parental Control, SETUP menu ........... 25
PiP Mark, SETUP menu ...................... 25
PIP, remote control ................................. 6
Playback, SETUP menu ....................... 25
POP UP/MENU, remote control ............ 8
tS"ogram play ........................................ 19
PROGRAM, remote control ................... 6
tS"oxy Setting, SETUP menu ................ 25
N
Remote control ....................................... 6
REPEAT, remote control ....................... 6
RETURN, remote control ...................... 8
S
Screen Saver, SETUP menu ................. 24
Search function ..................................... 19
SEARCH, remote control ....................... 7
Second Audio, On Screen menu .......... 17
Second Video, On Screen menu ........... 17
Secondary Audio Mark, SETUP menu
.......................................................... 25
Security, SETUP menu ........................ 25
SETUP menu ........................................ 21
SETUP menu operation ....................... 23
SETUP, remote control ......................... 7
SHUFFLE, remote control .................... 6
Slide Show, On Screen menu .............. 17
Software upgrade ................................. 30
Status menu ......................................... 18
STATUS, remote control ....................... 6
Subtitle Style, On Screen menu ........... 17
Subtitle, On Screen menu .................... 17
SUBTITLE, remote control ................... 6
Subtitle, SETUP menu ......................... 24
Supplied parts .........................................
System Information, SETUP menu ..... 27
System, SETUP menu ......................... 24
T
Time, On Screen menu ........................ 17
Title, On Screen menu ......................... 17
TOP MENU, remote control ................. 8
Track/File, On Screen menu ................ 17
Transition, On Screen menu ................ 17
Troubleshooting ................................... 31
TV Screen, SETUP menu .................... 26
TV System, SETUP menu ................... 26
TV, SETUP menu ................................ 26
U
Upgrade of software ............................ 30
Upgrade, SETUP menu ....................... 24
USB connection ................................... 11
USB content playback ......................... 13
Using Picture in Picture function ........ 20
V
Video Mode, SETUP menu ................. 27
Video Out Select, SETUP menu ......... 26
Video output formats ........................... 29
Video tS"ocess, SETUP menu .............. 27
Y
YouTube playback ............................... 16
Z
ZOOM, remote control .......................... 7
lz,
6"
6"
37 En
1 Para asegurar el mejor rendimiento de este aparato, lea
atentamente este manual. Y luego gudrdelo ell un lugar
seguro para poder consultarlo ell el futuro ell caso de ser
necesario.
2 Instale esta unidad ell un lugar bien ventilado, fi'esco, seco y
limpio, alejado de la luz directa del sol, fuentes de calor,
vibracidn, polvo, humedad y/o fi'fo. Para una adecuada
ventilacidn, permita que el equipo tenga el siguiente espacio
libre mfnimo:
Superior: 10 cm
Posterior: 10 cm
Laterales: 10 cm
3 Coloque este aparato lejos de otros aparatos eldctricos,
motores o transformadores, para evitar asf los ruidos de
zumbido.
4 No exponga este aparato a cambios bruscos de temperaturas,
del fi'fo al calor, ni 1o coloque en lugares muy hfimedos (una
habitacidn con deshumidificador, por ejemplo), para impedir
asf que se forme condensacidn en su interior, 1o que podrfa
causar una descarga eldctrica, un incendio, datios en el
aparato y/o lesiones alas personas.
5 Evite instalar este aparato en un lugar donde puedan caerle
encima objetos extratios y/o donde quede expuesto al goteo o
a la salpicadura de lfquidos. Encima de este aparato no ponga:
- Otros componentes, porque pueden causar dafios y/o
decoloraci6n en la superficie de este aparato.
- Objetos con fuego (velas, pot ejemplo), porque
pueden causar un incendio, dafios en el aparato y/o
lesiones alas personas.
- Recipientes con l/quidos, porque pueden caerse y
derramar el lfquido, causando descargas eldctricas al
usuario y/o dafiando el aparato.
6 No tape este aparato con un periddico, mantel, cortina, etc.
para no impedir el escape del calor. Si aumenta la
temperatura en el interior del aparato, esto puede causar un
incendio, datios en el aparato y/o lesiones alas personas.
7 No enchufe este aparato a una toma de corriente hasta
despu_s de haber terminado todas las conexiones.
8 No ponga el aparato al rev_s. Podrfa recalentarse y
posiblemente causar datios.
9 No utilice una fuerza excesiva con los comnutadores, los
controles y/o los cables.
.10 Cuando desconecte el cable de alimentacidn de la toma de
corriente, sujete la clavija y tire de ella; no tire del propio
cable.
.11 No limpie este aparato con disolventes qufinicos porque
podrfa estropear el acabado. Utilice un patio limpio y seco
para limpiar el aparato.
"12 Utilice solamente la tensidn especificada en este aparato.
Utilizar el aparato con una tensidn superior a la especificada
resulta peligroso y puede producir un incendio, datios en el
aparato y/o lesiones alas personas. Yamaha no se hard
responsable de ningfin datio debido al uso de este aparato con
una tensidn diferente de la especificada.
"13 Para impedir datios debidos a reldmpagos, desconecte el
cable de alimentacidn de la toma de corriente durante una
tormenta eldctrica.
"14 No intente modificar ni arreglar este aparato. Pdngase en
contacto con el personal de servicio Yamaha cualificado
cuando necesite realizar alguna reparacidn. La caja no deberd
abrirse nunca por ninguna razdn.
"15 Cuando no piense utilizar este aparato durante mucho tiempo
(cuando se ausente de casa por vacaciones, por ejemplo)
desconecte el cable de alimentacidn de la toma de corriente.
"16 Asegt_rese de leer la seccidn "Resolucidn de problemas"
antes de dar por concluido que su aparato estd averiado.
"17 Antes de trasladar este aparato, pulse (J.) para ponerlo en el
modo de espera, y luego desconecte el cable de alimentacidn
de CA de la toma de corriente.
"18 La condensacidn se formard cuando cambie de repente la
temperatura ambiental. Desconecte en este caso el cable de
alimentacidn de la toma de corriente y no utilice el aparato.
"19 El aparato se calentard cuando la utilice durante mucho
tiempo. Desconecte en este caso la alimentacidn y luego no
utilice el aparato para permitir que se enfi'fe.
20 Instale este aparato cerca de la toma de CA y donde se pueda
alcanzar fficihnente la clavija de alimentacidn.
2"1 Las baterfas no deberdn exponerse a un calor excesivo como,
por ejemplo, el que producen los rayos del sol, el fuego y
similares.
Este aparato no se desconecta de la fuente de
alimentacidn de CA si estfi conectada a una toma de
corriente, aunque la propia aparato est_ apagada con IQ).
A este estado se le llama modo de espera. En este
estado, este aparato ha sido disefiada para que consuma
un cantidad de corriente muy pequefia.
ADVERTENCIA
PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O
DESCARGA ELI_CTRICA, NO EXPONGA ESTE
APARATO A LA LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD.
El componente lfiser de este producto es capaz de emitir
radiacidn que sobrepasa el lfmite establecido para la
clase 1.
Especificaciones LASER:
Producto LASER de Clase 1
Longitud de onda: 790 nm (CD)1658 nm (DVD)/405 nm (BD)
Salida de lfiser: m_ixima de 1 mW
SEGURIDAD CONTRA LA RADIACION LASER
Este aparato utiliza rayos l_ser. Debido a la posibilidad de
que seproduzcan dafios en los ojos, lltextracci6n de llt
cubierta del aparato o las reparaciones solamente deber_n ser
realizadas por un tdcnico cualificado.
PELIGRO
Este aparato emite radiaci6n l_ser visible cuando se abre.
Evite llt exposici6n directa a los rayos l_ser. Cuando se
conecte este itpitrato it unit toillit de corriente no acerque sus
ojos a llt abertura de llt bandeja del disco ni aotras aberturas
para mirar al interior.
Precaucion-i
M
Qu6 puede hacer con este reproductor ........... 2
Piezas incluidas ................................................. 2
Informacibn sobre discos y archivos ............... 3
Tipos de discos/archix, os que pueden utilizarse con este
reproductor ................................................................. 3
Para cargar un disco ........................................................ 4
Precauciones con los discos ............................................ 4
Aviso para ver im@enes de video en 3D ....................... 4
Tecnologfa Cinavia ......................................................... 4
Controles y funciones ....................................... 5
Panel dehmtero ............................................................... 5
Panel trasem ................................................................... 5
Mando a distancia ........................................................... 6
Conexibn HDMI ................................................. 10
Conexi6n con el terminal HDMI .................................. 10
Conexidn para la reproduccidn de discos Blu-ray 3D.... 10
Conexi6n de red y USB ................................... 11
Conexi6n con el terminal NETWORK ......................... 11
Conexi6n con el conector USB .................................... 11
Asistente inicial/Configuracibn Sencilla ........ 12
Configuraci6n con cl Asistente inicial/Configuracidn
Sencilla ..................................................................... 12
Menu HOME/MEDIA ......................................... 13
Reproduccidn dc fotos/mOsica/vfdeo ............................ 13
Uso de contenidos de red .............................................. 15
Uso de servicios de red ................................... 16
Reproduccibn de videos de YouTube TM ........ 16
Funciones avanzadas de reproduccibn ......... 17
Mcnfi cn pantalla .......................................................... 17
Ment_ de estado ............................................................. 18
Uso de Marcador .......................................................... 19
Programacidn de la reproducci6n ................................. 19
Uso de la bt_squeda ...................................................... 19
Uso de BONUSVIEW ]_{y BD-Live ]_ ........................ 20
Utilizacidn de la funcidn hnagen en hnagen
(reproduccidn de audio/vfdeo secundario) ............... 20
Utilizaci6n de la funci6n BD-Live ]_{........................... 20
Menu SETUP ..................................................... 21
Ejemph) de funcionamiento del mcnfi SETUP ............. 23
Configuracidn General .................................................. 24
Configuracidn de pantalla ............................................. 26
Configuracidn de audio ................................................. 27
Sistema de Informacidn ................................................ 27
Acerca de los formatos de salida de audio .................... 28
Acerca de los formatos de salida de video .................... 29
Actualizacibn de software ............................... 30
Acmalizacidn del softv_are ............................................ 30
Resolucibn de problemas ................................ 31
Alimentacidn ................................................................. 3 l
Funcionamiento Nisico ................................................. 31
Reproduccidn de disco .................................................. 31
hnagen ........................................................................... 32
Sonido ........................................................................... 32
Red ................................................................................ 33
Mensajes en pantalla ..................................................... 33
Glosario ............................................................. 34
Especificaciones .............................................. 35
lnformacidn general ...................................................... 35
Entrada/salida ................................................................ 35
Propiedad intelectual ..................................................... 36
|ndice ................................................................. 37
(al final de este manual)
Information about software .................................... i
Acerca de este manual
- Este manual describe cdmo utilizar este reproductor con
un mando a distancia, excepto cuando no est_ disponible.
Tambi_n se puede acceder a algunas de estas
operaciones mediante los botones del panel delantero.
- Las notas contienen informacidn importante sobre
seguridad e instrucciones de funcionamiento. Las
indicaciones sefialan consejos de funcionamiento.
- Este manual se ha impreso antes de la fabricacidn. El
disefio y las especificaciones estfin sujetos a cambios
en parte como resultado de mejoras, etc. En caso de
diferencias entre el manual y el producto, este 61timo
tiene prioridad.
Iconos utilizados en este manual
Los iconos se utilizan para indicar botones/funciones
disponibles para un formato particular. Para obtener
informacidn sobre los discos y formatos que se pueden
reproducir, consulte pfigina 3.
1_11 : Video BD
II_k'_ : DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DVD+VR
: CD de audio
IkTll_FN_: archivos de vfdeo
N_[Wk'NI_: archivos de audio
: archivos de fotos
1Es
Puede ajustar la configuracidn de idioma y TV.
Ademfis de los discos Blu-ray, este reproductor tambi_n admite la reproduccidn de otros tipos de
discos.
Puede disfrutar de mils pelfculas en los discos Blu-ray mils recientes.
Con este reproductor se pueden reproducir archivos grabados en discos/dispositivos de memoria
USB.
El contenido del PC se puede reproducir en el televisor o el receptor de A/V conectando este
reproductor a un servidor de red.
Puede conectar dispositivos con un cable HDMI y controlarlos con un finico mando a distancia
utilizando la funci6n Control HDMI.
Puede disfrutar instantfineamente de vfdeos a trav& de Internet con este reproductor.
* Para obtener informacidn sobre los discos y formatos que se pueden reproducir, consulte la pfigina 3.
** Para utilizar esta funcidm es necesaria la configuracidn de red.
Asegfirese de que con el producto se han suministrado los siguientes accesorios.
Mando a Pilas (x2)
distancia (AAA, R03, UM-4)
2 Es
Tipos de discos/archivos que
pueden utilizarse con este
reproductor
- En este reproductor se pueden reproducir discos de
12 cm y 8 cm. No utilice un adaptador de 8 cm a
12 cm.
- Utilice discos que sean compatibles con los
estfindares que se indican con la presencia de
logotipos oficiales en la etiqueta del disco. La
reproducci6n de discos que no cumplan con estos
estfindares no estfi garantizada. Ademfis, la calidad
de imagen o sonido no estfi garantizada aunque
puedan reproducirse estos discos.
Tipo de soporte
BD-ROM/BD-R/
BD-RE
DVD-ROM
DVD-R/DVD-R
DL/DVD-RW
DVD+R/DVD+R
DL/DVD+RW
CD-ROM
CD-R/CD-RW
USB*
DLNA
Formato de grabacibn
BD-Vidco/archivos de datos
DVD-Video
DVD-Video/DVD-VR/AVCHD/archiw)s de
datos
DVD-Video/DVD+VR/AVCHD/archiw)s de
datos
CDDA/HDCD
CDDA/archivos de datos
Archivos de datos
Archiw)s de datos
Este reproductor es compatible con un dispositivo de
memoria USB con formato FAT 16132 y NTFS.
MP3 (.rap3)
WMA (.wma)
AAC (.aac/.m4a)
WAV (.way)
FLAC (.flac)
.... reproducibles reproducibles
reproclUClDleS
MKV con H.264 JPEG (.jpeg/.jpg)
(.inky) GIF (.gif)
MPEG PS (.mpeg/ PNG (.png)
.mpg)
MPEG TS (.ts)
MPEG-4 (.rap4)
VOB (.w_b)
AVI (.avi)
ASF (.asf)
WMV (.wmv)
- No se garantiza la reproduccidn de los archivos
incluidos en la tabla anterior en funci6n del m_todo
utilizado para la creaci6n del archivo o del c6dec
empleado.
- No pueden reproducirse los archivos con protecci6n
de los derechos de autor.
- AI utilizar DLNA, el archivo debe cumplir los
requisitos del servidor DLNA.
Informaci6n sobre la gesti6n de la
regi6n en los videos Blu-ray Disc/DVD
- Los discos y los reproductores de vfdeo Blu-ray
Disc/DVD tienen c6digos de regi6n, que dictan las
regiones en las que se puede reproducir un disco.
Consulte la marca de c6digo de regi6n que aparece
en el panel trasero de este reproductor.
- En el caso de un Blu-ray Disc, el disco puede
reproducirse en este reproductor si tiene la misma
marca de c6digo de regi6n o bien la marca "ABC"
de cddigo de regi6n.
- En el caso de un disco DVD, el disco puede reproducirse
eneste reproductor si tiene la misma marca de c6digo de
mgi6n o bien la marca "ALL" de c6digo de regi6n.
Ejemplosde cbdigo deregibn
BD-Video
Cddigo de regidn "A" o"ABC"
DVD-Video
C6digo de regi6n "1" o "ALL"
- Las operaciones y funciones de vfdeo Blu-ray Disc/
DVD pueden ser diferentes de las explicaciones que
aparecen en este manual y algunas operaciones
pueden estar prohibidas debido alas configuraciones
del fabricante del disco.
- Si aparece una pantalla de men6 o instrucciones de
funcionamiento durante la reproducci6n de un disco,
siga el procedimiento de funcionamiento indicado.
- Seg6n el disco, puede que no sea posible su reproducci6n.
- Finalice todos los soportes de grabaci6n que desee
reproducir en este reproductor.
- "Finalizar" hace referencia a un procesamiento al
que se somete un disco grabado para que se pueda
reproducir en otros reproductores/grabadores, asf
como en este reproductor. Solo pueden reproducirse
en el reproductor los discos que se hayan finalizado.
(Este reproductor no dispone de una funci6n para
finalizar discos.)
- No se garantiza la reproducci6n de todos los archivos
de un disco, dispositivo de memoria USB y de la red.
- Un archivo con protecci6n de los derechos de autor
no se puede reproducir a trav& de un dispositivo de
memoria USB o red.
Requisitos de los archivos de audio
- Frecuencia de muestreo: entre 32 - 48 kHz (MP3/
WMA), LPCM 44,1 kHz/16 bits/est&eo (WAV),
192 kHz/24 bits (FLAC)
- Bitrate: entre 8 - 320 kbps (MP3), 32 - 192 kbps
(WMA)
Requisitos de los archivos WMV
- WMV9; laresolucidn m_ximaes de 1.920x 1.080.
=7
r-
¢)
o
8:
3Es
Para cargar un disco
- Inserte el disc() con la etiqueta hacia arriba.
- En el caso de un disco grabado por ambos lados,
ponga boca abajo el lado que va a reproducir.
- La reproducci6n pod6a iniciarse automiticamente,
dependiendo del disco y la configuraci6n del
reproductor.
- Es posible que el menO aparezca primero, segOn el
disco.
- El tiempo para cargar el disco puede variar
dependiendo del disco.
Precauciones con los discos
Tenga cuidado con los arafiazos y el polvo
- Los discos Blu-ray Disc, DVD y CD son sensibles al
IX)No,a las huellas dactilares y especialmente a los
aratiazos. Es posible que no se pueda reproducir un
disco con aratiazos. Maneje los discos con cuidado y
guirdelos en un lugar seguro.
Almacenamiento apropiado de los discos
Ponga cl diNco cn cl cenlro de la c_@t y _
ahnacene la cgLiay el disco en posicidn
vertical.
Evile guardar los discos en lugares con luz _'___..,,_solar directa, cerca de eqtfipos de calelhccidn _" "(5,."
o en lugares con una humedad alta. _-_
No deje caer los discos ni los someta a _'_
vibraciones o impactos fuertes. 4_
gvite almaccnar los discos en lugares _-_L'_; f?_-_ "_
©
humedad.
Precauciones de manipulaci6n
Si la superficie esti sucia, lfmpiela con
cuidado con un patio suave humedecido
(con agua solamente). Cuando limpie los
discos, mueva siempre el patio desde el
orificio central hacia el borde exterior.
No utilice pulverizadores de limpieza de
discos de vinilo, benceno, diluyente,
lfquidos para prevenir la electricidad
estitica ni otros disolventes.
- No toque la supefficie.
- No pegue papel ni etiquetas adhesivas en el disco.
- Si la superficie de reproducci6n de un disco esti
sucia o rayada, el reproductor puede decidir que el
disco es incompatible y expulsar la bandeja
portadiscos o es posible que el disco no se
reproduzca correctamente. Limpie cualquier mancha
de la supefficie de reproducci6n con un patio suave.
Limpieza de la lente lectora
- Noutilice nunca discosde limpiezade venta enel mercado.
La utilizacidnde estos discospodrfadafiarla lente.
- Solicite la limpieza de la lente en el centro de atencidn
al cliente aprobado por Yamaha lnis cercano.
Aviso paraver imagenesde video en 3D
- Algunas personas pueden sufrir molestias (como
vista cansada, fatiga o niuseas) al ver imigenes de
vfdeo en 3D, Se recomienda a todos los espectadores
realizar pausas periddicas durante la visualizacidn de
imigenes de vfdeo en 3D,
- Si sufre alguna molestia, deje de ver las imigenes de
vfdeo en 3D hasta que _sta desaparezca, Consulte
con un m_dico si sufre molestias agudas,
- Lea atentamente los manuales de instrucciones (del
Blu-ray Disc y del televisor) y los mensajes de
precaucidn que aparecen en el televisor,
- La vista de los nitios pequetios (especialmente de
menos de seis atios) todavfa esti en proceso de
desarrollo, Consulte con su m_dico (como un
pediatra o un oftalmdlogo) antes de permitir a nitios
pequetios ver imigenes de vfdeo en 3D,
- Los nitios pequetios deben estar bajo la supervisidn
de un adulto para garantizar que siguen las
recomendaciones descritas anteriormente,
Tecnologia Cinavia
- La tecnologfa Cinavia forma parte del sistema de
protecci6n de los contenidos incluido en este
reproductor de Blu-ray Disc.
Es posible que aparezcan los siguientes mensajes y
que su reproductor de Blu-ray Disc detenga la
reproducci6n o silencie temporalmente la salida de
audio si reproduce una copia no autorizada de un
contenido protegido mediante la tecnologfa Cinavia.
Estos mensajes aparecen solo en ingl&.
Reproducci6ndetenida. Loscontenidosquese estfin
reproduciendoestfin protegidospot CinaviaTM y su
reproducci6nen este dispositivono estfi autorizada.
Paramils informaci6n,visite http://www.cinavia.com.
C6digo de Mensaje 1.
Salida de audiotemporalmentedetenida. Noajusteel
volumen de reproduccidn.Loscontenidosque se
estfin reproduciendoestfin protegidospor CinaviaTM y
sureproduccidnen estedispositivonoestfi autorizada.
Paramas informaci6n,visite http://www.cinavia.com.
Cddigo de Mensaje 3.
Aviso sobre Cinavia
Este producto utiliza la tecnologfa Cinavia para limitar el
uso de copias no autorizadas de algunas pelfculas y vfdeos
comerciales y de sus bandas sonoras, AI detectar el uso
prohibido de una copia no autorizada, apareceri un
mensaje y se detendri la reproduccidn o la copia,
Pare obtener mils informacidn sobre la tecnologfa Cinavia,
consulteel Centro de infonnaci6n al consumidor deCinavia, que
encontmri en el sitio web http://www.cinavia.com. Pare solicitm
mis infonnaci6n sobre Cinavia por correo, envfeuna carta con
su direcci6n de correo a: Cinavia Consumer hffonnation Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, Estados Unidos.
4 Es
Panel delantero
l _YAMAHA 1 _
usB
=
i
=
=
i
8
o.,.
0
,,-z
_ (Encendido/en espera)
Pone en lnarcha el reproductor/activa el lnodo en espera.
Si mantiene pulsado este botdn durante
aproximadamente 5 segundos, forzarfi el arranque del
reproductor (se reiniciarfi el sistema).
@ Puerta de la bandeja portadiscos
_= (Expulsar)
Abre/cierra la bandeja portadiscos.
Coneetor USB (p_g. 11)
@
Visor del panel delantero
Muestra distintos tipos de informaci6n sobre el estado
del dispositivo.
JP_ (Reprodueei6n)
Inicia la reproducci6n.
JJ_ (Pausa)
Pone la reproduccidn en pausa.
@ _ (Detener)
Detiene la reproducci6n.
- Una pelfcula protectora colocada en la frbrica cubre el panel delantero de este reproductor. Retfrela antes de empezar
a utilizar el reproductor.
Panel trasero
L
Cable de alimentaci6n
Este reproductor tiene un cable de alimentaci6n
cautivo, Con_ctelo a una toma de corriente de CA
despu_s de realizar todas las conexiones (prig, 10),
- Para prevenir el riesgo de descargas el&tricas, no
toque las partes sin aislamiento de ningfin cable
cuando el cable de alimentaci6n est_ conectado.
Terminal HDMI (p_g. 10)
Conector USB (pbg. 11)
@
Terminal NETWORK (pbg. 11)
5Es
Ila_'_l'i'll'i'_r_ i i,ifi,Ii,ii i_
Mando a distancia
- _ aparecerri en la esquina superior izquierda de la
pantalla cuando la tecla pulsada no est_ disponible.
®
Transmisor de se_ales infrarrojas: emite la serial
infrarroja. Oriente esta ventana al sensor del mando a
distancia (prig. 9).
@ MARKER _ I_'_Nl: establece un Marcador
(prig. 19) en un punto concreto de una pelfcula. Tras
definir un Marcador, para seleccionar el punto de
ajuste al que desea ir, pulse DIGEST. Puede definir
hasta 12 marcadores.
@ _=: abre/cierra la bandeja portadiscos.
@ PROGRAM _ _ : establece el orden de
reproduccidn (prig. 19). Puede configurar hasta 15
pistas (para discos de audio) o tftulos/capftulos (DVD-
Video).
@ SHUFFLE _ _ _ _ Fa'ar_:
selecciona el modo de reproducci6n aleatoria (prig. 17).
@REPEAT_ _ _ _
: permite cambiar el modo de repeticidn. El
modo de repeticidn mostrado a continuacidn cambiarri
cada vez que se pulse el botdn.
gT_: repite el tftulo que se estri reproduciendo.
{=c_.):repite el capftulo que se estri reproduciendo.
{7_._: repite la carpeta que se estri reproduciendo.
_A_}: repite todas las pistas/archivos del disco.
L--_: repite la pista/archivo que se estri reproduciendo.
@ PIP _ : permite encender/apagar la funcidn Imagen
en imagen (prig. 20). Marca PIP (['_-']) se muestra en
pantalla cuando esta funcidn estri disponible. Tambi_n
puede seleccionar esta opcidn desde el menfi en
pantalla (prig. 17).
- Marca PIP se muestra solo cuando la Marca PIP estri
activada (prig. 25).
@ 2ND AUDIO Ir_ll: selecciona el audio secundario de
la funcidn Imagen en imagen (prig. 20) o los
comentarios de audio. Cuando esta funcidn estri
disponible se muestra en pantalla Marca Audio
Secundario ([--_) (prig. 27). Tambi_n
puede
seleccionar esta opcidn desde el menfi en pantalla
(prig. 17).
- Marca Audio Secundario se muestra solo cuando la
Marca Audio Secundario estri activada (prig. 25).
@ Botones num_ricos: permiten introducir nfimeros
o, durante la reproduccidn, saltar a la pista/capftulo
correspondiente al nfimero introducido. Es posible que
estos botones no est_n disponibles en funcidn del tipo
de disco y la situacidn de reproduccidn.
6 Es
@ ENTER: selecciona el menf/opcidn resaltado.
@ STATUS: muestra la informacidn de reproduccidn
(prig. 18).
@ SUBTITLE _ _ I_l=d_: permitecambiar
el idioma de los subtftulos (prig. 35) si estri disponible.
Tambi_n puede seleccionar esta opcidn desde el menfi
en pantalla (prig. 17).
@ HOME: muestra la pantalla del menfi HOME
(prig. 13).
@ DIGEST _: muestra 12 fotograffas en
miniatura. Cuando se muestran las miniaturas, puede
ira la prigina siguiente o anterior con _l/_ll_.
_ : muestra la barra de seleccidn
Marcador (prig. 19).
@ IQ):enciende el reproductor o 1o pone en modo de
espera.
@ ZOOM | _ _: acerca/aleja la
imagen. El tamafio de la pantalla cambiarri cada vez
que pulse la tecla (acercar/alejar la imagen: 3 pasos
cada uno).
@ Botones de colores _ :utilice estos botones
segfin las instrucciones en pantalla.
@ A/B INq | _ _ I[_INNI: permite
reproducir una parte especffica que desee repetir.
1 Pulse A/B en la escena donde desee establecer el
punto inicial. Aparecerri "A-" en la pantalla.
2 Vuelva a pulsar A/B en la escena donde desee
establecer el punto final. Aparecerri "A-B" en la
pantalla. Se inicia la reproduccidn de la repeticidn.
3 Para cancelar la reproduccidn de la repeticidn, pulse
A/B. Desaparecerri "A-B" y terminarri la
reproduccidn de la repeticidn.
@ ANGLE _ _ : permite cambiar el ringulo de
la crimara si el video se ha grabado con varios ringulos.
Cuando esta funcidn estri disponible se muestra en
pantalla Marca de Angulo (_). Tambi_n puede
seleccionar esta opcidn desde el menfi en pantalla
(prig. 17).
- Marca de Angulo se muestra solo cuando la Marca
de Angulo estri activada (prig. 25).
ContinUa en la p_igina siguiente. _,
g
8
o_
1,=
0
0
- Es posible que esta funcidn no se pueda realizar
dependiendo de 1as especificaciones del disco.
@ SEARCH_ | _ _ _:
permlte ira un punto especificado durante la
reproduccidn. Para conocer los detalles sobre esta
funcidn, consulte "Uso de la bfisqueda" (prig. 19).
Tambi_n puede seleccionar esta opcidn desde el menfi
de estado (prig. 18).
@ SETUP: muestra la pantalla de menfi SETUP
(prig. 21 ).
@ AUDIO _ | : permite cambiar el idioma o
formato de audio. Tambi_n puede seleccionar esta
opcidn desde el menfi en pantalla (prig. 17).
@ CLEAR: borra el nfimero introducido o la opcidn
seleccionada.
7Es
®
CLEAR SEARCH
©©
E_TER SETUP
© @ ©
STATUS SUBTITLE AHGLE AUDIO
©©©©
_YAMAHA
Botones de cursor (A/_v/_I/_): permiten cambiar
la selecci6n en la pantalla de men6.
ENTER: selecciona el menO,/opci6n resaltado.
TOP MENU _ _ : muestra la pantalla de
men6 principal si el disco contiene un men6.
Seleccione la opci6n deseada mediante A/V/_I/_ y
ENTER.
®
®
- Las operaciones concretas pueden diferir
dependiendo del disco. Siga las instrucciones de
cada pantalla de men6,
RETURN: permite volver al men6 o pantalla anterior,
etc.
Botones de control
: detiene la reproducci6n. Para detener totalmente
la reproducci6n, pulse dos veces este bot6n.
| m: pone la reproducci6n en pausa.
_--: reproduce el contenido.
permite buscar hacia atrfis/hacia adelante. La
velocidad de b6squeda cambiarfi cada vez que pulse el
bot6n (buscar hacia atrfis/adelante: 5 pasos cada uno).
Pulse _ para reanudar la reproducci6n normal.
: permite cambiar la velocidad de un pase de
diapositivas (mils lento/mfis rfipido: 3 pasos).
_/D,_,_ : permite saltar hacia atrfis/hacia adelante.
- En funci6n del disco, el reproductor reanuda la
reproducci6n desde el punto en el que se par6
anteriormente el reproductor. Para reproducir desde
el prmcipio, pulse _ dos veces y despu& _.
POP-UP/MENU _ | : muestra el men6
emergente. Los contenidos del men6 que aparecen
varian en funci6n del disco. Encontrarfi mils
informaci6n sobre c6mo very controlar el men6
emergente en el manual del disco.
La pantalla del men6 principal aparece a veces al
pulsar POP-UP/MENU, dependiendo del DVD.
ON SCREEN: muestra el men6 en pantalla (prig. 17).
8 Es
Instalaci6n de las pilas en el mando a
distancia
- Cambie las dos pilas cuando note que disminuye el
alcance del mando a distancia.
- Utilice pilas AAA, R03 y UM-4.
- Asegfirese de que las polaridades son las correctas.
Consulte la ilustracidn que encontrarfi en el interior
del compartimento de las pilas.
- Extraiga las pilas si no va a utilizar el mando a
distancia durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado.
- No mezcle pilas viejas con pilas nuevas.
- No utilicejuntas pilas de diferentes tipos (como pilas
alcalinas y pilas de manganeso). Lea con atencidn la
informacidn del paquete, ya que diferentes tipos de
pilas pueden tener la misma forma y color.
- Si observa fugas en las pilas, des_chelas
inmediatamente. Evite tocar el material derramado y
no deje que entre en contacto con ropa, etc. Limpie
con cuidado el compartimento antes de colocar pilas
nuevas.
- No mezcle las pilas con los residuos dom_sticos;
des_chelas siguiendo la normativa local.
- Mantenga las pilas fuera del alcance de los nifios. En
caso de que se traguen una por accidente, acuda
inmediatamente a un m_dico.
- Si tiene previsto no utilizar el mando a distancia
durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, extraiga
las pilas del mando a distancia.
- No cargue ni desmonte las pilas suministradas.
Alcance aproximado de
funcionamiento del mando a distancia
Sensor del mando a distancia
J_
i°°
' 3_ ! 30°
6m
g
Q.
0
0
a:
9Es
Conexion con el terminal HDMI
- Puede disfrutar de imagen y sonido digital de alta calidad a trav_s del terminal HDMI.
- Conecte con firmeza un cable HDMI (de venta en el mercado) a los terminales HDMI.
- Consulte la prigina 28 para obtener informacidn sobre los formatos de salida de audio/video.
- Utilice cables HIGH SPEED HDMI con el logotipo HDMI (tal como se muestra en la contraportada).
;Precauci6n!
No conecte el cable de alimentacibn del reproductor hasta haber realizado todas las
conexiones,
Este reproductor
AI terminal HDMI
"_AI terminal de entrada HDMI
Cable HDMI
(de venta ell el mercado)
[]
1
!
i
I
i
I
!
I
I
I
- Cuando utilice la funcidn Control HDMI,
consulte "Control HDMI" (prig. 24).
- Para obtener mris informacidn sobre el modo
de salida del terminal HDML consulte
"HDMI" (prig. 27).
- Si no aparece la imagen, consulte "Resoluci6n
de problemas" (prig. 32).
Conexion para la
reproduccion de discos
Blu-ray 3D
Para disfrutar de discos Blu-ray 3D en este
reproductor, necesita los equipos y conexiones
siguientes:
- Necesita un televisor y un receptor de A/V (si
es preciso) con funcionalidad 3D.
- Todos los componentes deben estar
conectados con cables HDMI.
- El Blu-ray Disc debe contener imrigenes 3D.
- Debe ajustar la opcidn Salida 3D de
Configuracidn de pantalla (prig. 26) en Auto.
Receptor de AN
TV
10_
Conexion con el terminal NETWORK
- El contenido del PC se puede reproducir conectando este reproductor a la red.
- Puede disfrutar de un amplio abanico de contenidos con funciones interactivas mediante la conexi6n a Internet
cuando reproduzca discos compatibles BD-Live. Consulte la prigina 20 para obtener mris informaci6n sobre las
funciones de BD-Live.
- Conecte con firmeza un cable de red (de venta en el mercado) al terminal NETWORK.
- Utilice solo un cable de red STP (par trenzado blindado).
- Cuando utilice Internet, necesitarri una conexi6n a Internet de banda ancha como se muestra mris abajo.
- Conecte el otro conector del cable de red al nodo/enrutador de banda ancha.
- Cuando utilice una conexi6n a Internet de banda ancha, es necesario un contrato con un proveedor de servicios de
Internet. Para mris informaci6n, p6ngase en contacto con su proveedor de servicios de Internet mris cercano.
- Consulte el manual de instrucciones de su equipo, ya que el equipo conectado y el m_todo de conexi6n pueden
variar dependiendo de su entorno de Internet.
- Emplee un cable de red/enrutador compatible con 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX.
Conexion con el conector USB
- euede conectar un dispositivo de memoria USB para Almacenamiento Local al conector USB del panel posterior (o
delantero) del reproductor para guardar los datos BD-Live o para actualizar el software de este reproductor.
- Conecte con firmeza un dispositivo de memoria USB (de venta en el mercado) al conector USB.
PRECAUCION:
- No desconecte el dispositivo de memoria USB
ni desenchufe el cable de alimentaci6n mientras Estereproductor
se est4n realizando las operaciones de BD-Live
(prig. 20) o se est4 llevando a cabo la
actualizaci6n del software.
- No utilice un cable de extensi6n USB cuando
conecte un dispositivo de memoria USB al
conector USB del reproductor. El uso de un
cable de extensi6n USB puede impedir que el
reproductor funcione correctamente.
- Yamaha no puede garantizar que los
dispositivos de memoria USB de todas las
marcas funcionen con este reproductor.
Dispositivo de memoria USB
(deventaenel mercado)
- Para guardar datos de
BD-Live en el dispositivo f-
de memoria USB del panel
frontal, ajuste
Ahnacenamiento Local
en USB Frontal ]_rb
(prig.24).
.<:::] AI terminal I
I NETWORK I
Cable de red
(de venta en el mercado)
] AI terminal
_]LAN
o
o
X
Internet Modem Nodo o enrutador
de banda ancha
PC
I
Despu6s de la conexibn
- Para configurar el parrimetro de Red manualmente, consulte "Red" (prig. 25).
- Para reproducir el contenido del PC conectado a su red, consulte "Uso de contenidos de red" (prig. 15).
Configuracion con el Asistente inicial/Configuracion Sencilla
Asistente inicial/Configuraci6n Sencilla le permite configurar fricilmente el idioma, la resoluci6n y la relaci6n de aspecto
de la pantalla. La pantalla del Asistente inicial aparece la primera vez que enciende este reproductor despu& de
comprarlo. La misma configuraci6n se puede realizar desde el menfi SETUP -+ Sistema -+ Configuraci6n Sencilla.
1 Cuando aparezca la pantalla Configuraci6n Sencilla,
pulse ENTER para empezar con la Configuraci6n
Sencilla.
Configure el idioma, la resoluci6n y la relaci6n de
aspecto de la pantalla siguiendo los mensajes que
aparecen en pantalla.
- Si no aparece la imagen tras completar Asistente
inicial/Configuraci6n Sencilla, consulte "Resoluci6n
de problemas" (prig. 32).
- Aparecerri un mensaje de advertencia acerca de la
reproducci6n de video en 3D al encender este
reproductor. Pulse ENTER para descartar el
mensaje o CLEAR para desactivarlo (prig. 24).
12_
Los menfis HOME y MEDIA le permiten examinar y
reproducir archivos multimedia guardados en discos de
datos, dispositivos de memoria USB y en su red.
- Para obtener informacidn sobre los discos y formatos
que se pueden reproducir, consulte la prigina 3.
Reproduccion de fotos/musica/
video
Funcionamiento bdsico
</_/A/V: mueve la seleccidn.
<: vuelve a la carpeta principal.
HOME: permite entrar/salir de la pantalla del menfi
HOME.
ENTER: confirma la carpeta/archivo.
Operaciones comunes para la
reproducci6n de archivos en una
carpeta seleccionada
Ejemplo: selecci6n deun archivo de pelfculaen un
dispositivo de memoria USB
- Detenga la reproduccidn del vfdeo antes de
desplazarse a la pantalla del menfi MEDIA.
1 Pulse HOME para ir a la pantalla del menfi HOME.
:D
¢
"o
a
Q.
0
0
8:
- La pantalla del menfi HOME puede variar en funcidn
del modelo.
Pulse </_/A/V para seleccionar MEDIA y, a
continuacidn, pulse ENTER.
Aparece la pantalla MEDIA.
Iconos sobre el mend MEDIA
O : reproduce el disco que hay en la bandeja o muestra el
contenido del disco de datos.
: muestra el contenido del dispositivo de memoria
USB conectado al conector USB.
_._: busca un servidor DLNA (prig. 15) en la red.
: muestra el contenido del servidor DLNA conectado.
3 Seleccione el elemento que contiene el archivo que
desea reproducir y, a continuacidn, pulse ENTER.
I
13_
Seleccione la carpeta de Foto, Mtisica, Video o AVCHD
que desea reproducir y, a continuaci6m pulse ENTER.
Para volver a la carpeta principal, pulse < o seleccione
El.
- Para disfrutar del pase de diapositivas con mfisica,
pulse HOME para volver a la pantalla del menfi
HOME mientras se reproduce la mfisica y seleccione
un archivo de fotos.
- Tenga en cuenta queen el siguiente paso solo se
mostrarfin los archivos del tipo que seleccione en
este paso. Por ejemplo, si selecciona la carpeta Foto
en este paso, solo se mostrarfin archivos de fotos
despu& de este paso. Cuando desee reproducir un
tipo de archivo que no sea de fotos, vuelva a este
paso y seleccione de nuevo el tipo de archivo.
Seleccione las carpetas que contienen el archivo que
desea reproducir.
- Es posible que el archivo mostrado no se reproduzca
dependiendo del contenido.
Operaciones para la visualizaci6n de
fotos
Durante la visualizaci6n de fotos, los botones del mando a
distancia funcionan como se indica a continuaci6n.
t_: detiene el pase de diapositivas y vuelve al explorador
de archivos.
| ! : pone en pausa el pase de diapositivas.
p,_ : reproduce un pase de diapositivas.
: pasa a la foto siguiente.
: pasa a la foto anterior.
_,_ : aumenta la velocidad de un pase de diapositivas en
3 pasos.
-_,I_: reduce la velocidad de un pase de diapositivas en
3 pasos.
A: invierte una foto.
V: muestra la foto reflejada.
<: gira una foto en sentido contrario alas agujas del reloj.
_: gira una foto en el sentido de las agujas del reloj.
ZOOM: amplfa/reduce una foto (ampliar/reducir zoom:
3 pasos cada uno).
,t/V/41/_: permite desplazarse en modo de zoom
cuando la foto es mayor que la pantalla.
DIGEST: activa el modo de miniaturas (prig. 7). Cuando
se muestran las miniaturas, puede ir a la prgina siguiente o
anterior con _4._1_,_-_.
Seleccione el archivo que desea reproducir y, a
continuacidn, pulse ENTER.
Si selecciona un archivo de video, se inicia la
reproduccidn.
Si selecciona un archivo de mfisica, se muestra la
pantalla de estado y se inicia la reproduccidn.
Si selecciona un archivo de fotos, se inicia el pase de
diapositivas.
14_
Uso de contenidos de red
Este reproductor cuenta con la certificaci6n DLNA
(prig. 34). Puede administrar fotos, mfisica y vfdeos
almacenados en servidores DLNA de su red dom_stica.
Reproducci6n de contenido
compartido
1 Para reproducir archivos guardados en su PC, instale
un software de servidor DLNA como, por ejemplo,
Windows Media Player 12 y comparta los archivos que
desee reproducir.
2 Encienda el PC con el software de servidor DLNA
instalado o el dispositivo DLNA conectado a su red
dom_stica.
3 Pulse HOME para mostrar la pantana del menfi
HOME. Seleccione MEDIA para pasar al menfi
MEDIA. Los servidores DLNA conectados a la red
aparecen en pantalla.
- Si su servidor DLNA no aparece en la lista,
seleccione Buscar DLNA para buscarlo.
- Dependiendo del servidor DLNA, es posible que sea
necesario autorizar al reproductor desde el servidor.
- Para reproducir el archivo guardado en el servidor
DLNA, el reproductor y el servidor deben estar
conectados al mismo punto de acceso.
- Es posible que los requisitos de archivo no siempre
sean compatibles. Puede haber algunas restricciones
dependiendo de las caracterfsticas de los archivos y
de la capacidad del servidor DLNA.
4 Seleccione el archivo que desee reproducir.
- La calidad de funcionamiento y reproducci6n podr_a
verse afectada por las condiciones de la red
dom_stica.
- Es posible que los archivos de soportes extrafbles
como dispositivos de memoria USB o unidades de
DVD del servidor de soportes no se compartan
correctamente.
i'_l_fl,lipIjra:rdjraqqf,
15_
¢
a
Q.
¢)
0
Puede ver al instante los vfdeos que ofrecen los servicios de red siguientes.
- YouTube
- El acceso a contenidos suministrados por terceros requiere una conexidn a Internet de alta velocidad y, a veces,
tamhi_n un registro de cuenta y una suscripci6n de pago.
- Los servicios de contenidos de terceros pueden modificarse, suspenderse, interrumpirse o dejar de proporcionarse
en cualquier momento sin previo aviso, y Yamaha no asume ninguna responsabilidad en este sentido.
- Es posible que parte de los contenidos solo est_n disponibles en algunos parses y que se presenten en idiomas
especfficos.
- Yamaha no garantiza que los servicios de contenidos se seguirfin proporcionando ni estarfin disponibles durante un
periodo de tiempo concreto y rechaza cualquier garantfa de este tipo, ya sea expresa o implfcita.
Puede ver pelfculas de YouTube a trav& de Internet mediante este reproductor.
Los servicios pueden modificarse sin previo aviso.
1 Pulse HOME para mostrar la pantalla del menfi
HOME.
- La pantalla del menfi HOME puede variar en funcidn
del modelo.
Pulse </_/A/V para seleccionar YouTube y, a
continuacidn, pulse ENTER.
- Para volver a la pantalla del menfi HOME, pulse
RETURN.
16E_
En este capftulo se explica la reproducci6n de discos
Blu-ray, DVD y CD de venta en el mercado, asf como
discos DVD-RW/R grabados.
- Para conocer las funciones brisicas de reproduccidn,
consulte la prigina 6.
Mend en pantalla
Para mostrar el men6 en pantalla, pulse ON SCREEN. A
continuaci6n, pulse A/V/</_ para seleccionar una
opci6n y, despu&, pulse ENTER para utilizar la funci6n
deseada.
El men6 en pantalla consta de las siguientes opciones.
Titulo _ _ _: muestra el n6mero del
tftulo que se estri reproduciendo. Puede ir al tftulo deseado
seleccionrindolo desde esta opci6n.
Capitulo _ _ _: muestra el nfimero del
capftulo que se estri reproduciendo. Puede ir al capffulo
deseado seleccionrindolo desde esta opcidn.
Pista/Archivo E IFJl_j==L_i_ IgJ_=_J:
muestra el nOmero de la pista o archNo que se estri
reproduciendo. Puede ira la pista o al archivo deseado
seleccionrindolo desde esta opcidn.
Hora _ _ E _ _:muestrael
tiempo de reproduccidn. Seleccione el tipo de
visualizacidn entre las siguientes posibilidades:
- Tiempo de reproduccidn transcurrido del tftulo,
capftulo, disco, pista o archivo
- Tiempo de reproduccidn restante del tftulo, capffulo,
disco, pista o archivo
Modo/Modo de reproduccidn
_ _ _ FJ*/['_: muestra el
modo de reproducci6n actual. Puede seleccionar uno de
los modos de reproducci6n siguientes:
- Normal: reproducci6n normal.
- Shuffle: reproducci6n aleatoria sin repetici6n.
- Aleatorio: reproducci6n aleatoria con repetici6n.
- Normal
- Shuffle CH (capftulo)
- Shuffle TT (tftulo)
- Shuffle All
- Aleatorio CH (capftulo)
- Aleatorio TT (tftulo)
- Aleatorio All
- Normal
- Shuffle F (carpeta)
- Aleatorio F (carpeta)
Audio _ _ _ : muestra el idioma/serial de
audio del Blu-ray Disc/DVD seleccionado. Puede
seleccionar el tipo de audio deseado.
Angulo _ _ : muestra el nfimero del ringulo
seleccionado en ese momento. Si el vfdeo se ha grabado
con varios ringulos, puede cambiar el ringulo.
Subtitulo _ | _ : muestra el idioma de
los subtftulos seleccionado si hay subtftulos.
Estilo subtitulos _ : muestra el estilo de los
subtftulos seleccionado. Esta funcidn solo estri disponible
para subtffulos externos de archivo de video. Puede
seleccionar el estilo de texto deseado de los subtffulos.
Bitrate _ | _ _ _: muestra el
bitrate de la serial de audio/vfdeo.
Video secundario ll'_J_:activa o desactiva PIP (prig. 6).
Audio Secundario J_ : activa o desactiva el audio
secundario (prig. 6).
Bdsqueda Ins
_ _ _ _ : salta 30 segundos.
Repetici6n Ins
| E _ E_lliL"q_: reproduce el
contenido desde 10 segundos antes.
Pase de diapositivas: ll_3_@j=(_l:
muestra la velocidad del pase de diapositNas. Puede
seleccionar la velocidad del pase de diapositivas entre
Lento/Medio/Rripido.
Transicidn _: muestra cdmo aparece la foto en
la pantalla. Puede seleccionar el tipo de transicidn.
¢
a
o.
0
0
5:
17Es
Mend de estado
Muestra varios ajustes, cdmo los subtftulos, el ringulo y el
nfimero de tftulo/capftulo/pista reproducido. Para mostrar
el menfi de estado, pulse STATUS. El men6 de estado
consta de los siguientes menfis.
Ejemplo: Iconos que aparecen al reproducir un Blu-ray
Disc
IN!l =_!rd
Ejemplo: Iconos que aparecen al reproducir un archivo
de mfisica
q)@@ q)
@ _ (Estado de reproducci6n)
@ OMv (Icono de tipo de disco/archivo de video)
@ _(Ndmero del titulo que se est_i
reproduciendo): puede ir al tftulo especificado con
el botdn SEARCH (prig. 7).
@ _ (Ndmero del capitulo que se est_i
reproduciendo): puede ir al capftulo especificado
con el botdn SEARCH (prig. 7).
@ Q%_(Tiempo de reproduccibn transcurrido):
puede ir al punto especificado con el botdn SEARCH
(prig. 7).
@ U (Subtitulo seleccionado): puede cambiar el
idioma de los subtftulos con el botdn SUBTITLE.
@ _(Audio seleccionado): puede cambiar el formato
o idioma de audio con el botdn AUDIO.
@ Lc_I(Modo repeticibn): muestra el modo de
repeticidn actual (prig. 6).
@ _ (Estado de reproduccibn)
@ L=='_(Modorepeticibn): muestra el modo de
repeticidn actual (prig. 6).
@ [] (Icono de tipo de disco/archivo de mdsica)
@ (Grlificos) _ : muestra grrificos si el archivo
tiene estos contenidos.
@ _ (Ndmero de pista/archivo reproducido):
puede ira la pista especificada con el botdn SEARCH
(prig. 7).
@ (Informacibn) _: muestra informacidn sobre
la mfisica si estri incluida en el archivo.
@ (_) (Tiempo de reproduccibn transcurrido):
puede ir al punto especificado con el botdn SEARCH
(prig. 7).
@ (Barra de progreso) _: muestra el estado de
progreso de la cancidn actual.
@ @ ® ®
@ _l_ (Estado de reproduccibn)
@ [] (Icono de archivo de fotos)
@ _ (Ndmero del archivo mostrado)
@ C__7(Modo repeticibn): muestra el modo de
repeticidn actual (prig. 6).
@ (Velocidad de pase de diapositivas)
18_
Uso de Marcador _
Le permite establecer un Marcador en un punto
especificado del video. Despu& de establecer el
Marcador, puede ir al punto elegido utilizando esta
funci6n. Puede definir hasta 12 marcadores.
1 Pulse MARKER durante la reproducci6n de la pelfcula
para definir un Marcador. Se muestran el nfimero de
Marcador y el estado.
2 Despu& de establecer el Marcador, pulse DIGEST
para mostrar la barra de selecci6n de Marcador.
3 Pulse </_ para seleccionar el Marcador que desee
reproducir y, a continuaci6n, pulse ENTER.
Pulse CLEAR para eliminar el Marcador seleccionado.
Pulse ENTER para programar el orden de reproduccidn.
En un disco de audio, pulse A/V para seleccionar una
pista y, a continuacidn, pulse ENTER.
En un disco DVD de vfdeo, seleccione un tflulo
(indicado con TT) y un capflulo (indicado con CH) en
lugar de una pista.
Para borrar una pista configurada, seleccione la pista
que desea borrar y, a continuacidn, pulse CLEAR.
Pulse RETURN para cancelar la reproduccidn del
programa.
21J
¢
"o
a
Q.
¢1
- Cuando finaliza la reproduccidn (por ejemplo, al
expulsar el disco o al presionar _ dos veces), los
marcadores se eliminan automfiticamente.
Programacion de la
reproduccion |
Esta opcidn le permite programar el orden de
reproducci6n de las pistas de un disco de audio o de los
capftulos de un DVD.
Pulse PROGRAM durante la reproducci6n para mostrar
la ventana PROGRAMA para programar el orden de
reproducci6n.
Puede programar hasta 15 pistas/capflulos.
Ejemplo: Programacidn del orden de reproduccidn de las
pistas de un CD
1 Pulse PROGRAM durante la reproducci6n.
3 Una vez finalizada la programacidm pulse _ para
definir e iniciar la reproducci6n del programa.
4 Para cancelar la reproducci6n del programa, detenga la
reproducci6n por completo pulsando _ dos veces.
Uso de la busqueda
Esta opcidn le permite ira un punto especffico durante la
reproducci6n.
1 Pulse SEARCH durante la reproducci6n. Aparece la
barra de estado.
2 Pulse A/V/<I/I_ para seleccionar una de las opciones
siguientes y, a continuacidn, pulse ENTER.
Igl]!l IIi_1 :
- Nfimero de tftulo (indicado con _)
- Nfimero de capftulo (indicado con _ )
- Tiempo de tftulo transcurrido (indicado con Q )
- Tiempo de capflulo transcurrido (indicado con (_¢N)
(N!l:
- Nfimero de pista (indicado con _)
- Tiempo de pista transcurrido (indicado con T_K )
- Tiempo de disco transcurrido (indicado con _ )
_ _-_:
- Nfimero de archivo (indicado con _ )
- Tiempo de archivo transcurrido (indicado con (_))
- Nfimero de archivo (indicado con _ )
3 Pulse A/V o los botones num&icos para definir o
ajustar el valor de la opcidn seleccionada y pulse
ENTER para ir al punto especificado.
4 Para cerrar la barra de estado, pulse STATUS.
19_
Uso de BONUSVIEW TM y BD-Live TM
Este reproductor admite las funciones de reproducci6n de
BONUSVIEW (prig. 34) (BD-ROM Perfil 1versi6n 1.1) y
BD-Live (prig. 34) (BD-ROM Perfil 2).
- Las funciones y el m_todo de reproducci6n varfan
segfin el disco. Siga las indicaciones del disco o del
manual de usuario suministrado.
Utilizacion de la funcion Imagen
en Imagen (reproduccion de
audio/video secundario)
El Vfdeo BD que incluye audio y vfdeo secundario
compatible con Imagen en Imagen se puede reproducir
con audio y video secundario simultrineamente como un
vfdeo pequefio en la esquina.
Video principal Video secundario
Utilizacion de la funcion BD-Live TM
1. Ajuste la configuraci6n de red
(p_g. 25).
.
Conecte el dispositivo de memoria
USB al reproductor (p&g. 1 1).
Los datos de BD-Live se guardan en un dispositivo de
memoria USB conectado a este reproductor. Para
disfrutar de estas funciones, conecte un dispositivo de
memoria USB compatible con USB 2.0 de alta
velocidad (480 Mbit/s) al conector USB seleccionado
en Almacenamiento Local (prig.24). La configuraci6n
predeterminada es el conector USB del panel trasero.
La carpeta BUDA se crea automriticamente en el
dispositivo de memoria USB cuando es necesario.
Si el espacio de almacenamiento es insuficiente, los
datos no se copiarrin/descargarrin. Elimine datos
innecesafios o utilice otro dispositivo de memoria USB.
La carga de los datos (lectura/escritura) puede llevar
un tiempo.
Mientras se muestra Marca PiP ([-_-']) o
Marca Audio Secundario (E_), pulse
PIP para activar o desactivar la
funci6n Imagen en imagen.
- Para escuchar audio secundario, aseg6rese de que el
ajuste Salida de audio (HDMI) se encuentre en la
posici6n PCM o Recodificar (prig. 27).
- Dependiendo del disco, para escuchar audio
secundario, es posible que tenga que activar el audio
secundario desde el men6 principal del disco (prig.8).
- Dependiendo del contenido, el audio y el video
secundario para Imagen en Imagen pueden
reproducirse y desaparecer automriticamente.
Ademris, puede haber restricciones con respecto alas
rireas que pueden reproducirse.
Yamaha no puede garantizar que los dispositivos de
memoria USB de todas las marcas funcionen con
este reproductor.
No utilice un cable de extensi6n USB cuando
conecte un dispositivo de memoria USB al conector
USB del reproductor. El uso de un cable de
extensi6n USB puede impedir que el reproductor
funcione correctamente.
3. Reproduzca el disco.
4.
Ejecute BD.Live siguiendo las
instrucciones del disco.
- En relaci6n con el m_todo de reproducci6n de
contenidos BD-Live, etc., lleve a cabo las
operaciones de acuerdo con las instrucciones del
manual del Blu-ray Disc.
- Para disfiutar de las funciones de BD-Live, realice la
conexi6n de red (prig. 11)y los ajustes de Red (prig. 25).
- Consulte el apartado "Conexi6n BD-Live" (prig. 25)
para obtener informaci6n sobre la configuraci6n para
restringir el acceso a contenidos BD-Live.
- El tiempo que se necesita para descargar los
programas ofrecidos al dispositivo de memoria USB
conectado a este reproductor depende de las
velocidades de conexi6n a Internet y del volumen de
datos de los programas.
- Es posible que los programas BD-Live suministrados
a trav& de Internet no puedan mostrar la conexidn
dependiendo del estado (actualizacidn) del proveedor.
En este caso, extraiga el disco y vuelva a intentarlo.
- Si la pantalla BD-Live no aparece durante un rato
despu& de seleccionar la funcidn BD-Live en el
men6 del Blu-ray Disc, es posible que el dispositivo
de memoria USB no tenga suficiente espacio libre.
En este caso, expulse el disco del reproductor y, a
continuacidm borre los datos del dispositivo de
memoria USB utilizando el menfi "Formato" de
"Almacenamiento Local" (prig. 24).
20_
El men6 SETUP permite realizar diversosajustes y configuraciones audiovisuales en las funciones utilizando el mando a
distancia.
MenO/submenO Pagina
Sistema 24
Configuracion
General
Opcibn
Protector de pantalht
Reproduccidn
Automfitica Disc()
Control HDMI
Funcibn
Activa/desactiva cl protector de pantalht.
Ajusta el reproductor para que inicie autom;iticamente la
reproduccidn del disc().
Configura el repmductor para que rcciba la serial de control
desde el mando a distancia de su televisor/receptor de A/V.
Restablece todos los ajustes a los valores predeterminados,
excepto el ajuste Seguridad.
DLNA
Configuracidn
Proxy
24
24
Cargar
configuracion por 24
del'ecto
Acmalizar Aplica la actualizacidn del reproductor. 24
Configuracidn Ajusla el idioma, la resolucidn y la relacidn de aspecto de la
Sencilla pantalla. 24
Ahnacenamiento Muestra el estado de Ahnacenamiento Local (p_ig. 24),
Local l'ormatea Ahnacenamienlo Local y selecciona el conector 24
USB delantero o posterior de Ahnacenamiento Local.
Mens_tje Muestra un mensaje de advertencia acerca de la reproduccidn 24
Reproducci6n 3D de video en 3D al encender este reproductor.
Idioma OSD Selecciona el idioma del mend en pantalla. 24
Menfi Permite dar prioridad al idioma del menfi del disco. 24
Audio Permite dar prioridad al idioma del audio. 24
Subtftulo Permite dar prioridad al idioma de los subtftulos. 24
Reproduccion Marca de Angulo Permile moslrar la Marca de Angulo cuando se reproducen 25
Blu-ray Disc/DVD con varios _ingulos.
Marca PIP Permite moslrar la Marca PIP cuando se reproducen Blu-ray 25
Disc/DVD con hnagen en imagen.
Marca Audio Pernlile moslrar la Marca Audio Secundario cuando se
25
Secundario reproducen Blu-ray Disc/DVD con audio secundario.
Memoria filtima Configura este reproduclor para que recuerde la filtima
posici6n de reproduccidn de un disco cuando se pone en 25
modo de espera o si se abre la bandeja portadiscos.
Seguridad Cambiar Contraseria Permile cambiar la contraseria de Control Paterno y C6digo 25
de pals.
Control Paterno Establece el Control Patemo en funci6n del contenido del
disco. 25
Cddigo de pals Establece el C6digo de pals. 25
Red Conexidn a ]ntemet Permite definir la conexi6n a Internet en Permitir/Desactivar. 25
lnformacidn Muestra la pantalla de informacidn de red. 25
Prueba de conexidn Realiza la prueba de conexidn de red. 25
Configuracidn IP Permite definir la configuracidn IP en Auto/Manual. 25
Conexidn BD-Live Permile definir la conexi6n a BD-Live en Autorizada/
25
Permitida Parciahnente/Prohibido.
Permite del'inir la conexidn a DLNA en Permitir/Desactivar. 25
Permite definir la configuracidn proxy. 25
e-
21
MenWsubmenO
TV
Configuracion de
pantalla
Configuracion de
audio
Sistema de
Informacion
Opcibn
Salida 3D
Pantalla de TV
Funcibn
Selccciona _,fdcos en 3D o 2D.
Ajusta hi relacidn de aspecto de lit pantalla dcl televisor
conectado y ajusta la salida de vide().
Selecciona la resolucidn de la salida de vide().Seleccionar Salida
de Vide()
Sistema de TV Permite seleccionar el Sistema de TV entre NTSC/PAL/
Multi.
Color Space Permite seleccionar Color Space entre YCbCr 4:4:4/YCbCr
4:2:2/Full RGB/RGB.
HDMI Deep Color Permite seleccionar HDMI Deep Color entre 30 bits/36 bits/
48 bits/Desactivar.
HDMI 1080p 24Hz Ajusta HDMI 1080p 24Hz en la configuraci6n autom:itica o
lo desactiva.
Sincronismo de Ajusta el retardo entrc video y audio, como pot cjemplo
labios cuando el movimiento de la boca no se corresponde con la 27
VOZ.
Procesamiento Ajusta la imagen visual. 27
de Video
Ajusta Brillo/Saturaci6n/Tonalidad para cada color. 27
Ajusta el nivel de Reduccidn de ruido. 27
Ajusta c6mo detectar la serial de vide().
27
Modo de vide()
Ajuste de color
Reduccidn de ruido
Modo
desentrelazado
HDMI
DRC
Salida de audio Permite seleccionar el modo de salida del terminal HDMI
entre Bitstream/PCM/RecodificaffDesactiv ar.
Define el valor de DRC (Comprcsi6n de gama din:imica).
Muestra la versidn de softwarc y la direccidn MAC (p:ig. 34).
Pagina
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
27
27
27
22E_
Ejemplo de funcionamiento del
mend SETUP
Debe acceder a la pantalla del men6 SETUP para realizar
ajustes en el reproductor. A continuaci6n se explican las
operaciones brisicas del men6 SETUP.
qtVfi,l.-/atlq.-
4. Introduzca la contrasefia.
Introduzca la contrasefia con los botones numSricos.
- La contrasefia predeterminada es 0000.
- No puede ira la siguiente pantalla de
configuraci6n hasta que no haya introducido la
contrasefia correcta.
- Para cambiar la contrasefia, consulte el apartado
"Cambiar Contrasefia" (prig. 25).
e-
U)
U)
Ejemplo: Ajuste del Control Paterno
- Algunas opciones no se pueden ajustar durante la
reproducci6n. En este caso, pulse dos veces _ para
detener la reproducci6n completamente antes de
realizar el ajuste.
.
Muestre la pantalla del mend
SETUP.
Pulse SETUP para mostrar la pantalla del men6
SETUP.
Pulse </1_ para seleccionar Configuracidn General
y, a continuaci6n, pulse ENTER o v.
2. Seleccione un submend.
Pulse A/V para seleccionar Seguridad y, a
continuaci6n, pulse ENTER o el cursor I_.
3. Seleccione una opci6n del mend.
Pulse A/V para seleccionar Control Paterno y, a
continuaci6n, pulse ENTER o el cursor _.
.
Seleccione otra opci6n.
Pulse A/V para seleccionar el nivel de Control
Paterno para Blu-ray Disc/DVD y, a continuaci6n,
pulse ENTER.
6. Salga de la pantalla del mend.
Pulse < para volver al men6 anterior.
23
Configuracion General
Los ajustes predeterminados estrin marcados con .....
Sistema
Protector de pantalla
Puede activar o desactiw_r el protector de pantalla.
Cuando se activa, el reproductor pasarri al modo de
protector de pantalla si no se utiliza durante 3 minutos.
Posteriormente, el reproductor pasarri al modo de espera
cuando no se utilice durante 27 minutos.
Activar*, Desactivar
Reproducci6n Autom&tica Disco
Puede activar o desactivar la Reproducci6n Automritica
Disco. Cuando se activa, el disco se reproducirri
automriticamente despu& de cargarlo.
Activar*, Desactivar
Control HDMI
Puede ajustar el reproductor para que reciba uua serial de
control desde uu televisor/receptor de A/V compatible con la
fuuci6u Control HDMI a tray& de uu cable HDMI (prig. 10).
Activar, Desactivar*
Utilizaci6n de la funci6n Control HDMI
Con la funci6n Control HDMI, puede controlar de
forma interactiva este reproductor con su televisor (si es
compatible con la funci6n Control HDMI).
Cuaudo se couecta el reproductor a uu televisor compatible
con la fuuci6n Control HDMI mediaute uu cable HDMI y
seactiva el Control HDMI eu el meufi SETU_ (prig.24),
puedeu realizarse las fuucioues iudicadas a coutiuuaci6u.
• Funci6n de selecci6n de entrada automritica
Cuando inicie la reproducci6n en este reproductor, el
selector de entrada del televisor (y de un receptor A/V
si este reproductor estri conectado con el televisor
mediante un receptor A/V) pasarri automriticamente a
este reproductor. La alimentaci6n del televisor se
enciende automriticamente dependiendo del televisor.
• Funci6n de apagado automritico
Si apaga el televisor cuando este reproductor estrien modo
de parada y no se visualiza la pantalla del mend SETUP,
este reproductor tambi_n se apagarri automriticamente.
- Es posible que la funci6n Control HDMI no
funcione correctamente dependiendo del televisor.
- Otras funciones, aparte de las que se han
mencionado anteriormente, pueden funcionar
segfin el televisor o receptor A/V.
- Para poder utilizar la funci6n Control HDMI,
configure los ajustes de la funci6n Control HDMI
en TODOS los componentes (este reproductor, el
televisor y el receptor de A/V). Es posible que
tambi_n sean necesarias determinadas operaciones.
-Cada funcifinsepuede configurarde forma independiente
pars que se activeodesactivesegdnel televisor.
- Consulte los detalles relacionados con la configumci6n
en los manuales defuncionamiento que seproporcionan
con el televisor y/o el receptor A/V.
- Cuando estri activado, el consumo de energia
durante el modo de espera aumenta por la funcidn
Control HDMI.
Cargar configuracion por defecto
Puede restablecer todos los ajustes de este reproductor al
ajuste predefinido, excepto el ajuste Seguridad (prig. 25).
Para obtener informacidn sobre los ajustes
predeterminados, consulte las priginas 21-27.
Actualizar
Puede actualizar el software manualmente desde
Almacenamiento USB o Red. Para obtener informaci6n
sobre la actualizaci6n de software, consulte
"Actualizaci6n de software" (prig. 30).
Configuraci6n Sencilla
Puede realizar la Configuracidn Sencilla (prig. 12).
Almacenamiento Local
Puede mostrar informacidn de Almacenamiento Local,
formatear Almacenamiento Local y seleccionar USB
Frontal/USB Trasera para guardar los datos de BD-Live.
Para fonnatear (vaciar) la carpeta "BUDA" eu el dispositivo
de memoria USB, seleccioue Iut_rmacidu y pulse ENTER
lnieutms "Formato" estri selecciouado eu la pautalla.
USB Frontal, USBTrasera*
- Almacenamiento Local se utiliza como memoria
auxiliar cuando se reproduce un Blu-ray Disc.
Mensaje Reproducci6n 3D
Puede actNar o desactivar la visualizacidn de un mensaje
de advertencia acerca de la reproducci6n de video en 3D
en el televisor al encender este reproductor.
Activar*, Desactivar
Idioma
OSD
Puede seleccionar el idioma de pantalla, es decir, del
menfi o los mensajes mostrados en pantana como, por
ejemplo, el menfi SETUP.
English, gran_ais, Espa_ol, Deutsch, Italiano, Svenska,
Nederlandse, PyccK_gt, _2;_
Ment_
Puede dar prioridad al idioma del menfi del disco.
English, Frsn_ais, ¢p_, Espa_ol, Deutsch, Italiano,
Nederlandse, Portugues, Danes, Svenska, Finlandes,
Noruego, PyCCKH_, Corea, Japones, Mas
Audio
Puede dar prioridad al idioma del audio para la
reproduccidn de Blu-ray Disc/DVD. Para obtener
informacidn sobre la configuracidn de las opciones,
consulte "Menfi" (prig. 24).
Subtitulo
Puede dar prioridad al idioma de los Subtitulo.
English, Frsn_ais, _2;_, EspalSol, Deutsch, Italiano,
Nederlandse, Portugues, Danes, Svenska, Finlandes,
Noruego, PyCCK_R, Corea, Japones, M_is, Desactivar
(Los ajustes predeterminados de [Idioma] varian en
funcion del modelo.)
24 E_
_fl,_7_lq.-
Reproducci6n
Marca de Angulo
Puede ajustar la visualizacidn de la Marca de Angulo
(_) cuando se reproducen Blu-ray Disc/DVD con
varios ringulos.
Activar*, Desactivar
Marca PIP
Puede ajustar la visualizacidn de la Marca PIP (r_)
cuando se reproducen Blu-ray Disc (prig. 20) con Imagen
en imagen.
Aetivar*, Desaetivar
Marca Audio Secundario
Puede ajustar la visualizaci6n de la Marca Audio
Secundario (r-_-]) cuando se reproducen Blu-ray Disc con
audio secundario.
Aetivar*, Desaetivar
Memoria ultima
Puede configurar este reproductor para que recuerde la
filtima posici6n de reproducci6n de un disco cuando se
pone en modo de espera o se abre la bandeja portadiscos.
Aetivar*, Desaetivar
- Algunos discos no son compatibles con esta funci6n.
Seguridad
Cambiar Contrase6a
Puede ajustar la contrasefia para cambiar el nivel de
Control Paterno y el C6digo de pals. Consulte "Control
Paterno" (prig. 25) y "C6digo de pals" (prig. 25).
- La contrasefia predeterminada es 0000.
- Si olvida la contrasefia, consulte "Resoluci6n de
problemas" (prig. 31) y restaure todos los ajustes
predeterminados de Seguridad.
Control Paterno
En algunos discos Blu-ray/DVD, existe un nivel de
control para la visualizaci6n del disco en funci6n de la
edad del espectador. Puede ajustar el Control Paterno
mostrado en pantalla en funci6n del contenido del disco.
Es necesario introducir la contrasefia (consulte "Cambiar
Contrasefia" en prig. 25) antes de ajustar los niveles de
Control Paterno.
Despu& de ajustar el Control Paterno, si reproduce un
disco con un nivel mris alto del nivel de Control Paterno
actual o si desea cambiar el nivel de Control Paterno,
aparecerri un cuadro de dirilogo solicitando que introduzca
la contrasefia.
Desactivar,* 1-8
C6digo de pals
Puede ajustar el C6digo de pals del estado en el que vive.
Es necesario introducir la contrasefia (consulte "Cambiar
Contrasefia" en prig. 25) antes de ajustar el C6digo de pals.
Este parrimetro puede utilizarse para la calificaci6n de
Control Paterno y reproducci6n de discos.
Red
Conexi6n a Internet
Ajuste esta opci6n en Permitir cuando utilice BD-Live
(prig. 20) o DLNA (prig. 15), actualice el software desde la red
(prig. 30) o use otras funciones de red.
Permitir*, Desactivar
Informaci6n
Puede mostrar la pantalla de informacidn de red. En esta
pantalla puede ver informaci6n de Interfaz (Ethernet),
Tipo de direcci6m Direcci6n IP, Mriscara de subred,
Default Gateway y DNS.
Prueba de conexi6n
Puede realizar una prueba de conexi6n a Internet. Si la
prueba falla, compruebe la "Configuraci6n IP" (prig. 25) y
vuelva a realizar la prueba.
Configuraci6n IP
Puede configurar los ajustes de red.
Auto* Seleccione este valor para configurar
automfiticamente los ajustes de red de este
rcproductor con el servidor DHCP.
Manual Seleccione este valor para configurar los ajustes de
red (Direccidn IP, Mfiscara de subred, Default
Gateway y DNS) manuahnente.
- Teclas Permiten introducir caracteres.
num6ricas
- </_ Penniten cambiar la opcidn resaltada.
- CLEAR Permite eliminar un carricter.
- ENTER Permite guardar los ajustes y salir
del menfi.
Conexi6n BD-Live
Puede definir la restriccidn de acceso a los contenidos de
BD-Live.
Autorizada Permite clue todos los discos de BD-Live se conecten
a la red.
Permitida Permite utilizar dnicamente los discos con
Parcialmente* certificacidn de propietario.
Prohibido ProhNe que todos los discos de BD-Live se conecten
a la red.
DLNA
Puede ajustar la funcidn DLNA (prig. 34) en Permitir/
Desactivar. Cuando no utilice la funcidn DLNA, ajfistela
en Desactivar.
Permitir*, Desactivar
Configuraci6n Proxy
Puede definir Configuracidn Proxy. Ajuste la opcidn en
Desactivar para un uso normal. Seleccione Permitir para
definir la configuracidn del proxy.
Permitir Activa los ajustes del host y el puerto proxy.
Desactivar* Desactiva el servidor proxy. Seleccione esta opcidn
cuando no utilice el servidor proxy.
Host Proxy Define el host proxy.
Puerto proxy Define el puerto proxy.
_>.
r-
$,
25 E_
Configuracion de pantalla
Los ajustes predeterminados estrin marcados con .....
TV
Salida 3D
Puede selecckmar la salida de vfdeo en 3D o 2D desde
este reproductor.
Auto* Este reproductor selecciona autom_iticamente videos
en 3D o 2D.
Desactivar Este reproductor siempre selecciona videos en 2D.
- Aunque ajuste "Salida 3D" en "Auto" y reproduzca
un disco Blu-ray 3D, este reproductor selecciona
imrigenes en 2D en funci6n de la conexi6n y del
ajuste del televisor, etc. (prig. 10).
Pantalla de TV
Puede ajustar la relaci6n de aspecto de la pantalla del
televisor conectado y configurar la salida de video.
Si cambia de televisor, por ejemplo, porque ha adquirido
uno nuevo, y la relaci6n de aspecto de la pantalla del
televisor conectado cambia, tambi_n tendril que cambiar el
ajuste de Pantalla de TV.
16:9 Lleno Seleccidnelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un
televisor con pantalla 16:9. Cuando se reproduce
vfdeo con una relacidn de aspecto 4:3, el vfdeo se
muestra como aparece en la ilustraci6n.
16:9 Normal* Seleccidnelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un
televisor con pantalla 16:9. Cuando se reproduce
vfdeo con una relacidn de aspecto 4:3, el video se
muestra como aparece en la ilustraci6n.
4:3 Seleccidnelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un
Panorzimieo televisor con pantalla 4:3. Cuando se reproduce
vfdeo con una relacidn de aspecto 16:9, el video se
muestra como aparece en la ilustracidn.
4:3 Buzon Seleccidnelo cuando conecte el reproductor a un
televisor con pantalla 4:3. Cuando se reproduce
vfdeo con una relacidn de aspecto 16:9, el video se
muestra como aparece en la ilustracidn.
Tamaffode En un televisor 16:9 (pantalla
imagen panoramica)
original 16:9 Lleno 16:9 Normal
4:3
Tamafio de
imagen
original
16:9
En un televisor 4:3
4:3 Panorglmico 4:3 Buzbn
Seleccionar Salida de Video
Puede seleccionar la resolucidn de salida de vfdeo entre
Auto, 480i1576i, 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i y 1080p.
Cuando se define en Auto, la resoluci6n se ajusta a la
resoluci6n mrixima segfin el televisor conectado.
Para obtener mris informaci6n sobre los formatos de
salida, consulte "Acerca de los formatos de salida de
video" (prig. 29).
Auto*, 480i/576i, 480p/Sg6p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p
- Para emitir audio HD (Dolby TrueHD o DTS-HD
Master Audio) desde un terminal HDMI, configure
Seleccionar Salida de Video en Auto o un ajuste
superior a 720p.
Sistema de TV
Puede seleccionar el w_lor de Sistema de TV entre PAL,
NTSC y Multi. Ajuste el mismo valor de Sistema de TV
que su televisor. Para obtener mris informaci6n sobre los
formatos de salida, consulte "Acerca de los formatos de
salida de vfdeo" (prig. 29).
NTSC, PAL, Multi
(El ajuste predcterminado varfa en funcidn del modclo.)
Color Space
Puede seleccionar la salida Color Space (prig. 34) desde
HDMI. Esta funcidn estri disponible cuando el reproductor
se conecta con un cable HDMI.
YCbCr 4:4:4* Permite definir Color Space en YCbCr 4:4:4.
YCbCr 4:2:2 Permite definir Color Space en YCbCr 4:2:2.
Full RGB Si ha configurado RGB y el blanco y negro de la
pantalla estfin demasiado difuminados, seleccione
esta opci6n. Esta opcidn se aplica si un componente
conectado admire el intervalo RGB 0 255.
RGB Permite la salida de la serial de vfdeo con el rango
normal de serial.
- Esta funci6n solo estri disponible en televisores que
admitan dicha funci6n.
HDMI Deep Color
Si su televisor y/o receptor de A/V es compatible con
Deep Color (prig. 34), ajuste esta opci6n segfin su televisor
o receptor de A/V. Esta funci6n estri disponible cuando el
reproductor se conecta con un cable HDMI.
30 bits, 36 bits, 48 bits, Desactivar*
26_
HDMI 1080p 24Hz
Permite la salida de vfdeo BD codificado con una
velocidad de fotogramas de 24 Hz en HDMI 1080p 24Hz.
Con esta funci6n es posible que disfrute de una
reproducci6n de vfdeo mris fluida. Esta funci6n estri
disponible si el receptor de A/V o el televisor admiten esta
funci6n y el reproductor estri conectado con un cable
HDMI. Para obtener mris informaci6n sobre los formatos
de salida, consulte "Acerca de los formatos de salida de
video" (prig. 29).
Auto*, Desactivar
Puede definir
(prig. 35).
Auto*
- Este parrimetro se desactiva cuando la resoluci6n de
salida es diferente de 1080p.
Sincronismo de labios
o ajustar la funci6n Sincronismo de labios
Manual
Desactivar
Esle reproduclor ajusla la funci6n Sincronismo de
labios automfiticamenle.
Puede ajustar la funci6n Sincronismo de labios
manualmente. Puede definir el retraso del audio para
contenido 2D y 3D de l'orma independiente.
2D
3D
Esle reproductor no ajusta la funci6n Sincronismo de
labios.
Procesamiento de Video
Modo de video
Puede seleccionar Modo de vfdeo mris abajo.
Estzindar* La imagen es In:is natural y equilibrada. Este modo
cs adecuado para USOS normales.
Rico La imagen es re:is viva e iutensa.
Cine La imagen es adecuada para ver pelfculas en uua
habitaci6n a oscuras.
Particularizado Puede ajustar la imagen visual manuahnente. Pulse
A/V para seleccionar el parSmetro y, a contiuuaci6n,
pulse _111_ para ajustar la figura.
Brillo
Ajusta el brillo global dc la imagcn.
Saturacion
Ajusta la riqueza dc color de la imagcn proyectada.
Tonalidad
Ajusta el tono dc la imagcn proyectada.
Contraste
Ajusta las :ireas claras (nivcles dc bhmco) de ht
imagen.
Nitidez
Ajusta la nitidez de los elemuntos del ",.fdeo.
CTI
Suaviza los bordes de las im:igenes en color. De este
modo, las im:igenes en color se distiuguen re:is.
Los valores predeterminados son 0.
Ajuste de color
Ajusta los valores de Brillo/Saturacidn/Tonalidad para
cada color (RojoIVerdelAzullAmarilloICianIMagenta).
Para utilizar esta funci6n, ajuste Modo de vfdeo en
Particularizado. Para obtener mris informaci6n sobre la
configuraci6n de opciones, consulte "Modo de vfdeo"
(prig. 27).
Los valores predeterminados son 0.
Reducci6n de ruido
Puede configurar la Reduccidn de ruido a un nivel de entre
0 y 3.0 equivale a desactivado y 3 es el nivel mriximo.
0, 1,2*, 3
Modo desentrelazado
Puede seleccionar cdmo detectar la serial de vfdeo. Ajuste
la opcidn en Auto paraun uso normal. Cuando aparece en
la pantalla un ruido de desgarro horizontal, configure esta
opcidn en Pelfcula/Vldeo para eliminar el ruido.
Auto*, Pelicula, Video
Configuracion de audio
Los ajustes predeterminados estrin marcados con ......
Salida de audio
HDMI
Puede seleccionar el modo de salida del terminal HDMI.
Para obtener mris informacidn sobre los formatos de
salida, consulte "Acerca de los formatos de salida de
audio" (prig. 28).
Bitstream*, PCM, Recodificar, Desactivar
- Para emitir audio HD (Dolby TrueHD o DTS-HD
Master Audio) desde un terminal HDMI, configure
Seleccionar Salida de Video en Auto o un ajuste
superior a 720p (prig. 26).
DRC
Puede activar, desactivar o poner en modo Auto el DRC
(Compresi6n de gama dinrimica) (prig. 34). AI seleccionar
Auto, la DRC se activa automriticamente en una fuente
con informaci6n DRC en formato Dolby TrueHD. DRC
hace que los sonidos fuertes como los sonidos oclusivos se
escuchen menos y que las conversaciones sean mris
audibles. Resulta fitil cuando seven pelfculas de noche.
Desactivar, Activar, Auto*
Sistema de Informacion
Se muestran la versidn del software y la direccidn MAC
(prig. 34).
27
Acerca de los formatos de salida de audio
PCM 2 canales
PCM 5.1 canales
PCM 7.1 canales
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS
DTS HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
PCM 2 canales
PCM 2 canales
PCM 5.1 canales
PCM 5.1 canales
PCM 7.1 canales
PCM 7.1 canales
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
DTS
PCM hasta 5.1 canales
PCM hasta 7.1 canales
PCM hasta 7.1 canales
PCM hasta 5.1 canales
PCM hasta 5.1 canales
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
DTS HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
(Descodificacidn de
nt_cleo)
PCM hasta 5.1 canales
(Descodificacidn de
ndcleo)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital
Dolby TrueHD
DTS
DTS
DTS HD High Resolution
DTS
DTS-HD Master Audio
* "AS" es audio secundario.
** "SCB" es el sonido clic del botdm el efecto de sonido de los menfis emergentes, etc.
- Si HDMI se define en Bitstream, no se produce la salida de audio secundario. (prig. 27)
- Para emitir audio HD (Dolby TrueHD o DTS-HD Master Audio) desde un terminal HDMI, configure Seleccionar
Salida de Video en Auto o un ajuste superior a 720p (prig. 26).
28_
Acerca de los formatos de salida de video
Si Sistema de TV se define en NTSC
HDMI
BD-Video con
contenido
1080p124 Hz
Otros
* 1, * 2
4SOi
720p 60 Hz
1080i 60 Hz
|,lol-l-
1080p 241
60 Hz *2
1080p 60 Hz
Si Sistema de TV se define en PAL
HDMI
BD-Video con
contenido
1080p124 Hz
Otros
* 1, * 2
576i
720p 50 Hz
1080i 50 Hz
| ,lol-i -
1080p 24/
50 Hz *2
10S0p 50 Hz
*1 La resolucidn se ajusta en la resolucidn mrixima admitida por el televisor conectado. Por ejemplo, si la resolucidn
mrixima admitida por el televisor conectado es de 1080p, se ajustarri la resoluci6n 1080p.
*2 Si la fuente es un contenido de 1080p 24 Hz y el televisor conectado admite la salida de contenidos 1080p 24 Hz, se
utilizarri 1080p 24 Hz en lugar de 1080p 50160 Hz cuando la resoluci6n est_ ajustada en Auto o 1080p y la opci6n
Auto est_ seleccionada para HDMI 1080p 24Hz (prig. 27) en Configuraci6n de pantalla.
Si Sistema de TV se define en Multi
Si Sistema de TV estri configurado como Multi, la salida de la serial de vfdeo tiene la misma frecuencia que la fuente.
Consulte las tablas anteriores para obtener informaci6n sobre la configuraci6n de ffecuencia del televisor y la resoluci6n
de la serial de vfdeo de salida.
r-
- El parrimetro HDMI 1080p 24Hz se desactiva cuando la resoluci6n de salida es diferente de 1080p.
- Cuando Sistema de TV se define en NTSC y la fuente de vfdeo no es 60 Hz, la serial de salida de vfdeo se
convierte a 60 Hz.
- Cuando Sistema de TV se define en PAL y la fuente de vfdeo no es 50 Hz, la serial de salida de video se convierte
a 50 Hz.
29
Algunos de los discos Blu-ray que acaban de salir al mercado no se pueden reproducir a menos que actualice el software
del reproductor e instale la versidn mils reciente. Le recomendamos la actualizacidn para que el reproductor funcione con
el software mils actual.
Para comprobar la disponibilidad de una actualizacidn de software, visite
http://download.yamaha.com/
1.
.
- No extraiga el dispositivo de memoria USB, no ponga el reproductor en modo de espera ni desenchufe el cable de
alimentaci6n o el cable LAN mientras se lleva a cabo la actualizaci6n de software.
Actualizacion del software
Prep&rese para la actualizaci6n de
software.
Si actualiza el software desde Ahnacenamiento USB:
@ Guarde el paquete de archivos de actualizacidn en
la carpeta correspondiente en el dispositivo de
memoria USB. Para obtener mils informacidn,
consulte el documento de procedimientos adjunto
con el paquete de archivos de actualizacidn.
@ Conecte el dispositivo de memoria USB.
Omita el paso 2.
Si actualiza el software desde Red:
Compruebe que el reproductor estficonectado a la
red.
.
Actualice el software siguiendo
las indicaciones de los mensajes
que aparecen en pantalla.
La actualizacidn se ha completado. El sistema se
relnlclara.
Seleccione el m_todo de
actualizaci6n e inicie la
actualizaci6n desde el ment_ SETUP.
@ Pulse SETUP para mostrar la pantana del menfi
SETUP.
@ Seleccione Configuracidn General -+ Sistema -+
Actualizar.
@ Seleccione el elemento que contiene el paquete
de archivos de actualizacidn desde
Almacenamiento USB/Red.
El sistema buscarfi el paquete de archivos de
actualizacidn.
30
Consulte la tabla que aparece a continuaci6n cuando el reproductor no funcione correctamente. Si el problema que tiene
no aparece en la lista siguiente o las instrucciones no le sirven de ayuda, apague este reproductor, desenchufe el cable de
alimentaci6n y p6ngase en contacto con el centro de servicio o concesionario Yamaha autorizado mils cercano.
Alimentacion
Problema Posibles causas y soluciones
No hay alimentacion. Conectc correctmnente el cable de alimentacidn de CA.
Pulse (_) en el panel delamero para encender la alimentaci6n.
La alimentacion del reproductor esta La alimentacidn se desconectar5 automriticamente pasados 30 minutos seguidos de
apagada, inactividad (sin reproducci6n).
Funcionamiento basico
Problema Posibles causas y soluciones
El mando a distancia no funciona. Utilice el mando a distancia dentro dc su alcaucc opcratix.o. (prig. 9)
Cambie las pilas. (prig. 9)
Los botones no funcionan. Mantenga pulsado @ en el panel delantero durante mris de 5 segundos y dcje de pulsarlo
para reiniciar el rcproductor.
Para reiniciar completamente el reproductor, desenchufc el cable de alimentaci6n de la
toma de CA durante 10 segundes o mris, vuelva a enchufarlo y, a continuaci(m,
encienda el reproductor.
He olvidado la contrasefia. Mantenga pulsado m mly _ en el panel delantero simultrineamente sin ningdn disco
insertado y con la reproducci6n parada para restaurar los valores predeterminados de
todos los ajustes, iucluidos los ajustes de Seguridad (p@. 25). Una vez que la
alimentacidn se desconecte automriticamente, pulse Q) para w)lver a activarla.
Reproduccion de disco
Problema
El reproductor no puede reproducir un
disco.
El video se para.
El reproductor hace un sonido de
chasquido cuando comienza la
reproduccion o al cargar un disco.
Posibles causas y soluciones
Extraiga el disco y lfmpiclo. (prg. 4)
Asegfirese de que se ha cargado correctamente el disco (aliueado en la bandcja
portadiscos y con la cara de la etiqueta hacia arriba). (p_ig. 4)
Utilice un disco admitido por el reproductor. (prig. 3)
Extraiga el disco y compruebe si es un disco admitido por el reproductor o no. (prig. 3)
Compruebe el cddigo de regidn. (p_ig. 3)
Compruebe si el disco es defcctuoso probaudo con otro disco.
Los discos CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW/R DL y DVD-R/RW/R DL deben estar finalizados.
(prig. 3)
E1 reproductor se pararri si detecta golpes o vibraciones.
Estos sonidos no son sfntoma de averfa sino parle del funcionamiento normal del
reproductor.
5"
6:
6"
31 E_
Imagen
Problema
No hay imagen.
Posibles causas y soluciones
Asegfirese dc clue el cable HDMI estd concctado corrcctamente. (p_ig. l 0)
Asegfirese de que el televisor o receptor de A/V conectado estri ajustado a la entrada
correcta. (p@. 10)
Sin ningfu disco cargado o con la reproducci6n parada, mantenga pulsados los botones
y I1_ del panel delantero simultrineamente para restaurar el valor l)redetermiuado
de la rcsolucidn del video.
Si sigue sin aparecer la imagen, mantenga pulsado el botdn I1_ del panel delantem
durante unos 5 segundos para activar NTSC/PAL.
Pulse m y, despuds, reinicie la reproduccidn.
Desconecte la alimentacidn y condctela de nuevo.
Mantenga pulsado (_) en el panel delantero durante mris de 5 seguudos y deje de pulsarlo
para reiniciar el reproductor.
Ajuste la rcsolucidn deseada. (prig. 26)
La pantalla se congela y los botones de
control no funcionan.
La salida de video no tiene la resolucion
deseada.
El video de pantalla ancha aparece Cambic la relaci6n dc aspccto del televisor. (p_ig. 26)
estirado verticalmente o aparecen
bandas negras en las partes superior e
inferior de la pantalla. O el video 4:3
aparece estirado horizontalmente.
Aparece ruido cuadrado (mosaicos) en Es posibk" que aparezcan bloques en las im@enes en escenas con mox.imientos r_1pidos
la pantalla, debido alas caracteristicas de la tecnologfa de compresidn de imagen digital.
No se escucha el audio o las im_igenes Eta algunos discos en los clue se ha grabado contenido protegido por derechos de autor,
no se reproducen adecuadamente, es posible que no se escuche el audio o que las im_igenes no se reproduzcau
adecuadamente.
Sonido
Problema
No se escucha el sonido o est_i
distorsionado.
Posibles causas y soluciones
Compruebe que el cable HDMI estd conectado correctamente. (p_ig. 10)
Suba el volumen del televisor o del receptor de A/V.
No se escucha sonido durante el modo de reproduccidn fija, avarice rripido y rctroceso
r_1pido. (p_1g. 8)
Es posible que el audit) no se escuche dependiendo del estado de grabacidn del audit),
por cjemplo, si el contenido de audit) grabado no es de serial de audio o es audit) no
estrindar. (prig. 3)
Compruebe la conexidn HDMI. (prig. 10)Los canales de audio izquierdo y
derecho est_in invertidos o el sonido
solo sale por uno de ellos.
No se escucha el audio o las im_igenes En algunos discos en los quc se ha grant&) contenido protegido pot dcrechos dc autor,
no se reproducen adecuadamente, es posible que no se escuche el audio o que las im_igenes no se reproduzcau
adecuadamente.
No se escucha el sonido de PIP Ajuste HDMI en PCM/Recodificar. (p_ig. 27)
(audio secundario). Para escuchar el audio secuudario, pulse 2ND AUDIO. (prig. 6)
Dependiendo del disco, es posible que tenga que activar el audio secundario en el menfi
principal del disco (p_ig. 8).
32
lff_l,P.II,lli, ft,1,',J,')r._,,_._
Red
Problema
No se puede conectar a Internet.
No se pueden descargar contenidos
BD-Live.
No se puede detectar el servidor DLNA.
No se puede reproducir el archivo del
servidor de red domestico.
Posibles causas y soluciones
Conecte corrcctamente el cable de red.
Encienda el equip() conectado como, por cjemplo, un mddem o enrutador de banda
ancha.
Conecte correctamente el mddem y/o el enrutador de banda ancha.
Configure correctamente el valor o valores de la red. Consulte "Red". (p_ig. 25)
Conecte correctamente el cable de red. (p_ig. 11)
Conecte el dispositivo de memoria USB correctamente. Compruebe que el dispositivo
de memoria USB estd conectado al conector USB del reproductor. (prig. 11)
Compruebe si el Blu-ray Disc admire BD-Live.
Compruebe el ajuste de "Conexi6n a Internet". (prig. 25)
Conecte el dispositivo de memoria USB con formato FAT16, FAT32 o NTFS.
Se recomienda conectar el dispositivo de memoria USB con al menos 2 GB de espacio
libre. Si no hay suficiente espacio libre, lk_rmatee el dispositivo de memoria USB.
(p@. 24)
Consulte el manual del usuario suministrado con el disc() o pdngase en contacto con el
fabricante del disc().
Conecte correctamente el cable de red.
Encienda el equip() conectado como, por cjemplo un enrutador de banda ancha o el
servidor.
Asegfirese de que el reproductor y el servidor est_h_ conectados al mismo punto de
acceso.
Configure correctamente el valor o valores de la red. Consulte "Red". (p@. 25)
Dependiendo del servidor DLNA, es posible que sea necesario autorizar al reproductor
desde el servidor.
En funci6n del servidor DLNA, es necesario modificar el ajuste del cortafuego.
Asegfirese de que el archivo se puede reproducir. (p_ig. 3)
Compruebe la configuracidn del servidor DLNA.
La calidad de funcionamiento y rcproduccidn podrfa verse afcctada por las condiciones
de la red domdstica.
Mensajes en pantalla
- Los mensajes siguientes aparecer_n en la pantalla del televisor si el disco que mtenta reproducir no es apropiado o
la operaci6n no es correcta.
Mensaje de error Posibles causas y soluciones
Fichero no compatible E1 rcproductor no admire cl archivo. Consultc "Tipos dc discos/archi'_.os quc pucden utilizarsc con
este reproductor" (p_g. 3).
iCodigo de region err6neot El disc() tiene un cddigo de regidn incompatible. Consulte "]nformacidn sobrc la gestidn de la regi6n
en los vfdeos Blu-ray Disc/DVD" (prig. 3).
La red ha fallado. El rcproductor no se puede conectar a la red. Compruebe la conexidn (p_1g. l l ) y la configuracidn de la
red (p_ig. 25).
Red estzi bien, proxy ha E1 reproductor no se puede conectar al servidor proxy. Consulte "Configuracidn Proxy" (p_g. 25).
fallado.
La conexion BD-Live est_i La concxi6n dc BD-Live est:i prohibida. Consultc "Conexi6n BD-Lix.c" (prig. 25).
prohibida en el menu de
SETUP
iLa actualizacion ha fallado La actualizacidn ha fallado. Compruebc si cl archi'_.o dc actualizaci6n cstri dafiado o es ilcgible.
por alguna razbn!
=)
o
6:
=)
o.
6"
=_
33
AVCHD
AVCHD es un nuevo formato (estfindar) para cfimaras
de vfdeo de alta definici6n que se puede utilizar para
grabar y reproducir imfigenes de alta resoluci6n HD.
BD-Live 1_1
BD-Live es un estindar de Blu-ray Disc que utiliza una
conexidn de red y permite al reproductor conectarse a
Internet pare descargar vfdeos promocionales y otros datos.
BDMV
BDMV (pelfcula en disco Blu-ray) es uno de los
forlnatos de aplicacidn utflizados en BD-ROM, que es
una de las especificaciones de Blu-ray Disc. BDMV es
un forlnato de grabacidn equivalente a DVD-Video en la
especificacidn DVD.
Blu-ray 3D 1_1
Blu-ray 3D le permite ver imfigenes 3D de alta
definicidn completa.
BONUSVIEW lr,1
Los discos compatibles con BONUSVIEW le permiten
disfrutar simultfineamente de subcanal de vfdeo para dos
pantallas, subcanal de audio y subtftulos. Aparece una
pequefia pantalla dentro de la pantalla principal durante
la reproduccidn (Imagen en imagen).
Buzdn {LB 4:3)
Un tamafio de pantalla con barras negras en las partes
superior e inferior de la imagen para permitir la
visualizacidn de material en pantalla ancha (16:9) en un
televisor 4:3 conectado.
Color Space
Color Space es una gama de colores que se puede
representar. RGB es un espacio de color basado en el
modelo de color RGB (rojo, verde y azul) y se utiliza
norlnahnente en lnonitores de PC. YCbCr es un espacio
de color basado en una serial de luminancia (Y) y dos
serales de diferencia de color (Cb y Cr).
Deep Color
Deep Color hace referencia al uso de varias
profundidades de color en pantallas, a partir de
profundidades de 24 bits en versiones anteriores de la
especificacidn HDMI. Esta profundidad de bits
adicional permite que las pantallas HDTV y otros tipos
de pantallas pasen de millones a miles de millones de
colores y elilninen la aparicidn de bandas de color en
pantalla para disfrutar de unas transiciones tonales
fluidas y una gradacidn sutil entre colores. La mayor
relacidn de contraste pennite representar muchos lnis
tonos de gris entre blanco y negro. AdelniS, Deep Color
aumenta el nfmero de colores disponibles dentro de los
lflnites definidos por el espacio de color RGB o YCbCr.
Direeeidn Mac
La direccidn Mac es un valor 6nico asignado a un
dispositivo de red para su identificacidn.
DLNA
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) permite
compartir de forma sencilla contenidos digitales a
trav& de una red dom_stica, para que pueda disfrutar
de contenidos digitales almacenados en un PC con el
software del servidor DLNA instalado u otro
dispositivo compatible con DLNA con su televisor a
trav& de este reproductor. Para conectar este
reproductor a sus servidores DLNA se requieren
algunos ajustes del dispositivo odel servidor DLNA.
Para mils detalles, consulte el software del servidor
DLNA o el dispositivo DLNA.
Dolby Digital
Un sistema de sonido desarrollado por Dolby
Laboratories Inc. que da un alnbiente de sala de cine a la
salida de audio cuando el producto esti conectado a un
amplificador o procesador Dolby Digital.
Dolby Digital Plus
Un sistema de souido desarrollado como uua exteusidu de
Dolby Digital. Esta tecuologfa de codificacidu de audio es
compatible cou souido euvolveute de 7.1 cauales.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD es una tecnologfa de codificacidn sin
p&didas que admite hasta 8 canales de sonido
envolvente multicanal para los discos dpticos de la
prdxima generacidn. El sonido reproducido reflej a
fiehnente, bit a bit, la fuente original.
DRC (Control de gama dinfimica)
DRC le permite ajustar la gama entre los sonidos lnis
alto y lnis bajo (gama dinimica) para reproducir los
contenidos a un volumen intermedio. Utilfcela cuando
sea diffcil escuchar los diilogos o durante las horas en
que la reproduccidn pueda molestar a los vecinos.
DTS
Un sistema de sonido digital desarrollado por DTS, Inc.
para su uso en salas de cine.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio es una nueva
tecnologfa desarrollada para el forlnato de disco @rico
de alta definicidn de la prdxima generacidn.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio es una tecnologfa de
compresidn de audio sin p&didas desarrollada para el
forlnato de disco @rico de alta definicidn de la prdxima
generacidn.
FLAC
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec, Cddec libre de
comprensidn de audio sin p&dida) es un forlnato de
audio para la compresidn de datos de audio sin p&dida.
Aunque el grado de compresidn es inferior al de otros
forlnatos de audio COlnprimido con p&dida,
norlnahnente el audio es de mayor calidad.
34
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface, Interfaz
Multimedia de Alta Definici6n) es una interfaz que
admite vfdeo y audio en una sola conexi6n digital. La
conexi6n HDMI lleva sefiales de vfdeo (estfindar y de
alta definici6n) y sefiales de audio multicanal a
componentes A/V como, por ejemplo, televisores
equipados con HDMI en forma digital y sin
degradaci6n.
Panorfimico (PS 4:3)
Un tamafio de pantalla que recorta los lados de la
imagen para permitir la visualizaci6n de material de
pantalla ancha (16:9) en un televisor 4:3 conectado.
Sineronismo de labios
Sincronismo de labios, una abreviatura de "lip
synchronization", o sincronizaci6n de labios, es un
t&mino que hace referencia tanto a un problema
habitual como a la posibilidad de mantener
sincronizadas las sefiales de audio y vfdeo durante la
posproducci6n y la transmisi6n. La latencia de audio y
vfdeo requiere complejos ajustes por parte del usuario,
pero la versi6n HDMI incorpora una fnnci6n de
sincronizaci6n automfitica de audio y vfdeo que permite
a los dispositivos sincronizarse de forma automfitica y
precisa y sin la intervenci6n del usuario.
q['J-_ft['
Sonido PCM lineal
PCM lineal es un formato de grabaci6n de sefiales
utilizado para CD de audio yen algunos discos DVD y
Blu-ray. El sonido de los CD de audio se graba a
44,1 kHz con 16 bits. (El sonido se graba entre 48 kHz
con 16 bits y 96 kHz con 24 bits en discos DVD y entre
48 kHz con 16 bits y 192 kHz con 24 bits en discos
Blu-ray.)
Subtltulos
Son las lfneas de texto que aparecen en la parte inferior
de la pantalla y que traducen o transcriben el di_logo.
Estfin grabadas en muchos discos DVD y Blu-ray.
x.v.Color
x.v.Color reproduce una gama de colores m_s amplia
que antes, mostrando casi todos los colores que puede
detectar el ojo humano.
O
E
Informacion general
Alimentacidn
[Modelos de EE. UU. y Cana&i] ............................ 110-240 V CA, 60 Hz
[Modelo para Amdrica Central y del Sur] ......... 111t-240 V CA, 50/60 Hz
[Modelo para Australia] ......................................... 110-240 V CA, 50 Hz
[Modelopara ReinoUnido, Europay Rusia].........110-240 VCA, 50Hz
[Modelopara China] ..............................................110-240 VCA, 50Hz
[Modelopara Asia] ...........................................110-240 VCA, 50160Hz
[Modelopara Corea] ..............................................110 240 V CA, 60Hz
Consumode energfa(normal) .............................................................. 18W
Consumo(en espera) .............................................................0,5 W o menos
Dimensiones (An. x Al.x Pr.)........................................435 x 50 x 202 mm
Peso .....................................................................................................2,0 kg
Entrada/salida
Salida HDMI ................................................................. Conector tipo A x 1
480i/576i/480p/576p/720p/1080i/1080p/lI)80p @24Hz,
Compatibilidad con Deep Color, x.v. Color
USB ............................................................................... Conector tipo A x 2
Otros equipos ............................................................................. Ethernet x 1
Las especificaciones eshln sujelas a cambio sin previo aviso.
35
Propiedad intelectual
- El material audio-visual puede consistir de productos
con propiedad intelectual que no se deben grabar sin
la autorizacidn del poseedor de dicha propiedad
intelectual. Remftase a las leyes aplicables en su
pals.
- Fabricado con la licencia de Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby y el sfmbolo de la doble D son marcas
comerciales de Dolby Laboratories.
- Fabricado con licencia en aplicacidn de las patentes
de EE. UU.: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 y otras
patentes de los EE. UU. e internacionales registradas
o pendientes. DTS, el sfmbolo y DTS y el sfmbolo
juntos son marcas comerciales registradas, y DTS
Digital Surround y los logotipos DTS son marcas
comerciales de DTS, Inc. El producto incluye
software. O DTS, Inc. Todos los derechos
reservados.
- "Blu-ray Disc "r_t'', "Blu-ray "r_t'', "Blu-ray 3D "r_t'',
"BD-Live r_t'', "BONUSVIEW r_t'' y los logotipos
son marcas comerciales de la Blu-ray Disc
Association.
- _--@:_es una marca comercial de DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
- "HDMI", el logotipo "HDMI" y "High-Definition
Multimedia Interface" son marcas comerciales o
marcas comerciales registradas de HDMI Licensing
LLC.
- "x.v.Color" y el logotipo "x.v.Color" son marcas
comerciales de Sony Corporation.
- "AVCHD" y el logotipo "AVCHD" son marcas
comerciales de Panasonic Corporation y Sony
Corporation.
- Java y todas las marcas comerciales y logotipos
basados en Java son marcas comerciales o marcas
comerciales registradas de Sun Microsystems, Inc.
en los Estados Unidos y/o otros parses.
- Este producto se otorga con licencia en aplicacidn de
la licencia de cartera de patentes AVC y la licencia
de cartera de patentes VC-I para su uso personal y
no comercial por parte de un consumidor para (i)
codificar video que cumpla con las normas AVC y
VC-1 ("vfdeo AVC/VC-I") y/o (ii) descodificar
vfdeo AVC/VC-1 codificado por un consumidor
dedicado a una actividad personal y no comercial y/o
suministrado por un proveedor de vfdeo con licencia
para proporcionar video AVC/VC-1. No se otorga ni
se da por supuesta licencia alguna para cualquier
otro uso. Se puede obtener informacidn adicional de
MPEG LA, LLC.
Consulte http://www.mpegla.com.
- Windows Media Player es una marca comercial o
una marca comercial registrada de Microsoft
Corporation en Estados Unidos y/o en otros parses.
- YouTube y el logotipo YouTube son marcas
comerciales de Google. Inc.
- DLNA y DLNA CERTIFIED son marcas
comerciales y/o marcas de servicio de Digital Living
Network Alliance.
- Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation.
Cinavia TM es una marca comercial de Verance
Corporation. Protegida por la patente estadounidense
7.369.677 y patentes internacionales registradas y
pendientes de aprobacidn en virtud de la licencia de
Verance Corporation. Todos los derechos
reservados.
36
Numerics
2ND AUDIO, mando a distancia ........... 6
A
A/B, mando a distancia .......................... 7
Actualizacidn de software .................... 30
Actualizar, ment] SETUP ..................... 24
Ajuste de color, ment] SETUP ............. 27
Almacenamiento Local, mem_
SETUP ............................................. 24
ANGLE, mando a distancia ................... 7
Augulo, mem_ ell pantalla .................... 17
Asistente inicial .................................... 12
Audio Secundario, mem_ ell pantalla ... 17
Audio, formatos de salida .................... 28
AUDIO, maudo a distancia .................... 7
Audio, meut_ eu pautalla ...................... 17
Audio, meut_ SETUP ........................... 24
B
BD-Live ............................................... 20
Bitrate, meut_ eu pautalla ..................... 17
Botones de colores, maudo a distaucia ... 7
Botones de control, maudo a distaucia ... 8
Botones de cursor, maudo a distaucia .... 8
Botones uum_ricos, maudo a distaucia ... 6
Bt_squeda Ins, meut_ eu pautalla .......... 17
C
Cambiar Contrasefia, meut_ SETUP ..... 25
Capftulo, meut_ eu pautalla .................. 17
Cargar configuracion por defecto,
meut_ SETUP ................................... 24
CLEAR, maudo a distaucia ................... 7
Cddigo de pals, meut_ SETUP ............. 25
Color Space, meut_ SETUP .................. 26
Conexidn a Iuternet, meut_ SETUP ...... 25
Conexidn BD-Live, ment_ SETUP ....... 25
Configuracidn de audio, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 27
Configuracidn de pautalla, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 26
Configuracidn General, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 24
Configuracidn IP, meut_ SETUP .......... 25
Configuracidn tS"oxy, meut_ SETUP .... 25
Configuracidn Sencilla ........................ 12
Configuracidn Seucilla, meut_ SETUP
.......................................................... 24
Conteuido USB, reproduccidn ............. 13
Conteuidos de YouTube, reproduccidn
.......................................................... 16
Control HDMI, meut_ SETUP ............. 24
Control Pateruo, meut_ SETUP ............ 25
D
DIGEST, maudo a distaucia .................. 7
Disco de datos, reproduccidn ............... 13
DLNA, meut_ SETUP .......................... 25
DRC, meut_ SETUP ............................. 27
E
ENTER, maudo a distaucia ................ 7, 8
Estado, meut_ ........................................ 18
Estilo subtftulos, meut_ eu pautalla ....... 17
F
Fuucidn Control HDMI ........................ 24
Fuucidn de bt_squeda ............................ 19
Fuucionamieuto del meut_ SETUP ....... 23
H
HDMI 1080p 24Hz, meut_ SETUP ...... 27
HDMI Deep Color, meut_ SETUP ....... 26
HDMI, conexidn .................................. 10
HDMI, meut_ SETUP ........................... 27
HOME, maudo a distaucia ..................... 7
HOME, meut_ ....................................... 13
Hora, meut_ eu pautalla ........................ 17
I
Idioma, ment_ SETUP .......................... 24
Iuformacidn, meut_ SETUP .................. 25
M
Maudo a distancia .................................. 6
Marca Audio Secuudario, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 25
Marca de Augulo, meut_ SETUP .......... 25
Marca PIP, meut_ SETUP ..................... 25
Marcador .............................................. 19
MARKER, maudo a distaucia ................ 6
MEDIA, meut_ ...................................... 13
Memoria t_ltima, meut_ SETUP ............ 25
Meusaje Reproduccidn 3D, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 24
Ment], ment_ SETUP ............................ 24
Modo de vfdeo, meut_ SETUP ............. 27
Modo desentrelazado, meut_ SETUP ...27
Modo/Modo de reproduccidn, meut_
eu pautalla ........................................ 17
o
ON SCREEN, maudo a distaucia ........... 8
OSD, meut_ SETUP .............................. 24
P
Pautalla de TV, meut_ SETUP .............. 26
Pautalla, meut_ ...................................... 17
Pase de diapositivas:, meut_ eu pautalla
........................................................... 17
Piezas iucluidas ...................................... 2
PIP, maudo a distancia ........................... 6
Pista/Archivo, meut_ eu pautalla .......... 17
POP UP/MENU, mando a distaucia ....... 8
tS"ecauciones con los discos ................... 4
tS"ocesamieuto de Video, ment_ SETUP
........................................................... 27
PROGRAM, maudo a distaucia ............. 6
tS"ogramacidn de la reproduccidn ......... 19
tS"otector de pantalla, meut_ SETUP ..... 24
tS"ueba de conexidn, meut_ SETUP ...... 25
R
Red, conexidn ...................................... 11
Red, meut_ SETUP ............................... 25
Reduccidn de ruido, meut_ SETUP ...... 27
REPEAT, maudo a distaucia ................. 6
Repeticidn Ins, meut_ eu pautalla ......... 17
Reproduccidn Automfitica Disco,
ment_ SETUP ................................... 24
Reproduccidn, meut_ SETUP ............... 25
Requisitos de los archivos de audio ....... 3
Resolucidn de problemas ..................... 31
RETURN, maudo a distaucia ................ 8
S
Salida 3D, meut_ SETUP ..................... 26
Salida de audio, meut_ SETUP ............ 27
SEARCH, maudo a distaucia ................ 7
Seguridad, meut_ SETUP ..................... 25
Seleccionar Salida de Video, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 26
SETUP, maudo a distaucia .................... 7
SETUP, meut_ ...................................... 21
SHUFFLE, maudo a distaucia ............... 6
Siucronismo de labios, meut_ SETUP
.......................................................... 27
Sistema de Iuformacidn, meut_
SETUP ............................................. 27
Sistema de TV, meut_ SETUP ............. 26
Sistema, meut_ SETUP ........................ 24
Software, actualizacidn ........................ 30
STATUS, maudo a distaucia ................. 7
SUBTITLE, maudo a distaucia ............. 7
Subtftulo, meut_ eu pautalla ................. 17
Subtftulo, meut_ SETUP ...................... 24
T
Tftulo, mend eu pautalla ...................... 17
TOP MENU, maudo a distaucia ............ 8
Trausicidn, meut_ eu pautalla ............... 17
TV, meut_ SETUP ................................ 26
U
USB, conexidn ..................................... 11
Utilizacidn de la fuucidn hnageu
eu hnageu ........................................ 20
V
Video secuudario, meut_ eu pautalla .... 17
Vfdeo, formatos de salida .................... 29
Z
ZOOM, maudo a distaucia .................... 7
a"
o
37 _s
Information about software
This product uses tfie lollowing software.
For ink)rmation (c()pyrighl, etc) about each soltware_ read the original sentences stated below.
About Linux, Busybox, SquashFS, LIRC, U-boot,
gdb, mtd-utils
GNU GENERAL PUBLI(" LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989_ 1991 Free Sofware Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St, Fifh Floor, Boston, MA {)2110-13(}1 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses R)r most software are designed to take away your fi'eedom to share and
change it. By contrash the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
fi'eedom to share and change lree software--to make sure the software is fi'ee lot all its
users. This General Public License applies to mosl of the Free Software Foundation's
software and to any other program whose authors comn/it to using it. (Some other Free
Soltware Foundation software is covered by tfie GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of lree software, we are mfi2rring to ffeedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure tfiat you have the fi'eedom to distribute
copies of fi'ee software (and charge R)r INs service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want il, that you call change the software or use pieces of it ill
new fi'ee programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that tk_rbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities Rlr you if you distribute copies of the softwal_, or if you nlodify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or thr a lee, you
must give the recipients all lhe rights lhat you have. You must make sum lfiat they, too,
receive or call get the source code. alid you ii/us[ show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) ofter you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modily the software.
Also, thr each author's protection and ours, we waiIt to make cellain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty tk)rthis lree software. If lhe software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know thai what lhey have is
not lhe ()riginal, so that ally problems inlroduced by others will ]lot reflect on lfie
()riginal authors' mpulalions.
Finally, ally flee program is threatened constantly by soltware patenls. We wish to
avoid the danger that redistributors of a lree program will individually obtain patent
licenses, ill ell)el makflg the program proprietary. To prevent tfiis, we have made it
clear that any patent must be licensed fi_r everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions lor copying_ distribution and modification lollow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AN[) CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIB UTION AND
MODIFICATION
ft. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed
by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General
Public License. The "program", below, refi2rs to ally such program or work, and a
"work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work
under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafer_ translation is included without limitation ill lfie term "modift calion".)
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Aclivities other than copying, distribution and modification am not covered by this
License: lhey are oulside its scope. The act of running lhe Program is not restricted,
and the outpul from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work
based on the Program (independent of having been made by runnflg the Program).
Whether thal is true depends on what the Program does. 5.
I. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy all appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intacl all the notices that refi2r to this License and to lhe absence of any
warranty; and give ally other recipients of the Program a copy of tfiis License along
with the Program.
You may charge a t_e lk}rthe physical act ol transl_rring a copy, and you may at 6.
your oplion olt)r warranty proteclion ill exchange R)r a t)e.
2. You may modily your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of ih thus
forming a work based on lfie Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Seclion I above, provided lfial you also meet all of lhese
conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating tfiat you 7.
changed tfie files and the date of ally change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that ill whole or in pro1
contains or is derived lrom the Program or ally parl thereoL to be licensed as a
whole at no charge to all tfiird parties under the terms of tfiis License.
c) lfthe modified program normally reads commands inleractively when rum you
must cause iL when started running t_orsuch interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display all announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under tfiese
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception:
if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcenlent, your work based on the Program is not lX2ql]]redto print all
announcement.)
These requirements apply to lfie modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of
lhat work are nol derived from lfie Program, and call be reasonably considered
independent and separate works ill themselves, then this License, and its terms, do ]lot
apply to lhose sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program,
lhe distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions
lot other licensees extend to lfie entire whole, and lhus to each and every part regardless
of who wrote il.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
wrillen entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to coiitro] the
distribution of derivative or colleclive works based on the Program.
In addilion, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the
Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medimn does nol brflg the olfier work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)
ill object code or execulable tk_rm under the terms of Sections 1and 2 above
provided lfiat you also do one of lhe fifllowing:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding macNne-readable source code,
which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used lor software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written olt)r, valid lot at least tfiree years, to give any
third party, fk_ra charge no more than your cost of physically perfl._rmflg source
distribulion, a complete machine-readable copy of lhe corresponding source
code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections I and 2 above on a medium
customarily used t_orsoftware inlerchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the inf_}rmation you received as to the oiler to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only R)r
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program ill object
code or executable fi_rm with such all offi2r, ill accord with Subseclion b
above.)
The source code lot a work means the prelerred h}rm of the work R}rmaking
modifications to il. For all executable work, complete source code means all the source
code R}rall modules it contafls, plus any associated interface definition files, plus lhe
scripts used to control compilation and inslallalion of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (ill either source or binary R}rm) with the major components
(compiler, kernel and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component ilself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or ot_iect code is made by ol t)ring access to copy lrom a
designated place, then offi2ring equivalent access to copy lhe source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even lfiough third parties am ]lot
compelled to copy the source along with the ot)iecl code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program excepl as
expressly provided under this License. Ally attempt otherwise to copy, modily,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will nol have their licenses termflated so long as such
parties remain ill fi]ll compliance.
You am not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However,
nothing else grants you permission to modily or distribute the Program or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do nol accept this
License. Therelore, by inodilying or distributing the Program (or ally work based
on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of INs License to do so, and all its
terms and conditions fi_r copying, distributing or modilying lfie Program or works
based on it.
Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the origflal licensor to copy,
distribute or modily the Program sut)iect to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose ally lurlfier restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herefL You are nol responsible for enfi_rcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
[L as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent inlringement or fi_r
ally other reason (not lfinited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or olherwise) that contradicl lhe conditions of
lfiis License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisly simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertflent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute
the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty4ree
redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or fldirectly
lfirough you, then the only way you could satisly bolfi it and lfiis License would be
to mfrafl entirely from distribution of the Program.
If ally portion of this section is held invalid or unenthrceable under ally particular
circumstance, tfie balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as awhole
is intended to apply illotfier circumstances.
Itisnotthepurposeofthissectiontoinduceyoutoinlringeanypatentsorother
properlyrightclaimsortocontestvalidityofanysuchclaims;thisseclionhasthesole
purposeofprotectingtheintegrityofthelreesoftwalvdistributionsystem,whichis
implementedbypubliclicensepraclices.Manypeoplehavemadegenerous
contributionstothewiderangeofsoftwaredistributedthroughthatsysteminl_liance
(mconsistentapplicationofthaisystem;itisuptotheaulhor/donortodecideifheor
sheiswillingtodistributesol[warelhroughallyothersystemandalicenseecannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make lhoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either
by patents or by copyrighled interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
lhe Program under lhis License may add all explicit geographical distribution
limilation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries nol thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written ill the body of this License.
9. The Free Sol[ware Foundalion may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License l?om time to time. Such new versions will be similar ill
spirit to the present versiom but ]nay diftL'r in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version numhcr. If the Program specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of lollowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by lhe Free Soflware Foundation. If the Program does nol specil_¢ a
version number of this License, you ]nay choose ally version ever punished by the Free
Sol[ware Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are di[lerent, wrile to lhe author to ask R)r permission. For
sol[ware which is copyrighted by the Free Sol[ware Foundalion, write to lhe Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions lbr this. Our decision will be
guided by the lwo goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our fi'ee
sol[ware and of promoling lhe sharing and meuse of sol[ware generally.
NO WARRANTY
I1. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSE[) FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, [NCLUDIN& BUT NOT LIMITED T(L THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AN[) FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AN[)
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING. REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRE[) BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREE[)
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR RED[STRIB UTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPEC[AL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF S1JCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AN[) CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the gmatesl possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make il fi'ee software which everyone call
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the R)llowing notices to the program. It is sales[ to attach them to the
start of each source file to most eflectively convey lhe exch]sion of warranty; and each
file should have at least lhe "copyright" lille and a pointer to where lhe lull notice is
li_und.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of whal il does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of aulhor>
This program is [ree software; you can redistribute it and/or modily it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by lhe Free Software
Foundalion: eilher version 2 of the License, or (at your option) ally later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, bul WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See lhe GNU General Public
License lot more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
lhis program; if ]lot, write to the Free Soltware Foundatiom hie., 51 Franklin St,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add inlormation on how to contacl you by electronic and paper math
lfthe program is interactive, make it output a short nolice like this
when d slmls ill all interactive ]node:
Gnomovision version 69_ Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovisi(m comes
wilh ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY: tbr details type 'show w'. This is fi'ee
soltware, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type
_show c' k)r details.
The hypothetical commands _show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, lhe commands you use may be called
something other lhan 'show w' and 'show c': they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school if
any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" lor the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the ilames:
Yoyodyne, lnc, heJvby disclaims all copyrighl intmvst ill the program
_Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does ]lot permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is asubroutine libra U, you may consider it more
uselul to permit linking proprietary applications with lhe library. If lhis is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General
Public License ins[cad of lhis License..
About glibc, libmtp, libusb, libusb-compat, DirectFB,
SaWMan
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC L[CENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991_ 1999 Five Sollware Foundatiom Inc.
59 Temple Place, Sude 33{), Bostom MA 1)2111-13{)7 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license documenh
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version nmnber 2. I.I
Preamble
The licenses k)r most software am designed to lake away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrash the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee
your h'eedom to shame and change tree software--to make sum the software is tree t_r
all ils users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
sol[ware packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think camlully
about whether lhis license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy
to use ill any particular case, based ;m the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are relerring to ti_eedom of use, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure thai you have the ti_eedom to
distribute copies of fi'ee software (and charge lot this service if you wish); thai you
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and
use pieces of it ill new fi'ee programs; and thai you are inR}rmed lhat you call do these
things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restriclions lhat tk_rbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to
cellain responsibilities ti}r you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modit3* it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or R}ra t)e, you must
give the recipients all the rights lhat we gave you. You must make sum that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so thai lhey can relink them wilh the
library after making changes to lhe libra W and recompiling il. And you must show
them these terms so they know lheir rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
olt)r you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modily lhe library.
To pro[eel each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty tbr
the [ree library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed om the
recipienls should know that whal they have is not lhe original version, so that the
original author's mpulation will ]lot be aflected by problems that mighl be introduced
by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constanl threal to the existence of any [ree program.
We wish to make sure lhat a company cannot ellectively restrict the users of a tree
program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therelom, we insist
that any patent license obtained R)r a version of the library musl be consistent wilh lhe
[ull [reedom of use specified ill lhis license.
Mosl GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, tile GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to
cerlain designated libraries, and is quite diftL'rent from the ordinary General Public
License. We use this license tk_rcertain libraries in order to permit linking those
libraries into non-h'ee programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the lwo is legally speaking acombined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License themeR)m permits such linking only iflhe
entire combinalion fits its criteria of h'eedom. The l_sser General Public License
permits morn lax criteria Ik)r linking other code with the library.
We call this license lhe "Lesser" General Public License because it does l_ss to protect
the user's lreedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides olher ti_ee
sol[ware developers Less of an advantage over competing n(m4ree 1)rograms. These
disadvantages are the reason we use lhe ordinary General Public License R)r many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages ill certain special
circunlslallces.
For example, on rare occasions, theme may he a special need to encourage lhe widest
possible use of a certain library, so that il becomes a de-[acto standard. To achieve this,
non-free programs must he allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a
fi'ee library does the same job as widely used non-[ree libraries. In this case, lhere is
little to gain by limiting the free library to tree software only, so we use lhe l_sser
General Public License.
ii
In olfier cases, permission to use a particular libra1T in non-h'ee programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of fi'ee software. For example, permission
to use the GNU C Library in non-lS'ee programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operaling system, as well as its varianh the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' lreedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program lhat is linked wilh lfie Library has the lreedom
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions R}rcopying, distribution and modification lolh)w.
Pay close attention to the dill)fence between a "work based on the library" and a "work
that uses the library". The lk}rmer contains code derived from lhe library, whereas lhe
latter musl be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC L[CENSE
TERMS AN[) COND[T[ONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIB UTION AND
MODIFICAT[ON
(}. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other aulhorized parly saying il
may he distributed under the terms of lhis Lesser General Public License (also
called "lhis License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a colleclion of software funclions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of lhose lunctions and
data) to l_orm executables.
The "Library'2 helow, refi_rs to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means eilfier lhe Library
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, awork containing lhe
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightfi)rwardly into another language. (Hereinalter, translation is included wilhout
limilation in lhe term "modification".)
"Source code" lor a work means the prelermd lorm of the work lot making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all lhe source code lor
all modules it conlains, plus any associated interface definilion files, plus lhe scripts
used to control compilalion and installation of lhe library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification al_ not coveJ_d by this
License; they are oulside ils scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not l_stricted, and output fi'om such a program is covered only if its contenls constitute
a work based on lhe Libra U (independent of the use of lfie Library in a tool lor writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what lhe Library does and whal lhe program thai
uses the Library does.
I. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source
code as you receive it, in any medimn, provided thai you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer
of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refi_r to this License and to the absence
of any warranty; and dislribute a copy of this License along with lhe Library.
You may charge a ti_e lot the physical acl of translerring a copy_ and you ]nay al your
option oiler warranly protection in exchange lor a Ice.
2. You may modily your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of Section I above, provided thai you also meet all of lhese
conditions:
a) The modified work musl dself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent nolices stating lhat you
changed lhe files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of INs License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library relers to a fimction or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other lhan as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, lhen you must make a good laith
eftort to ensure lfiah in the event an applicalion does not supply such fimction
or table, the facility slill operates, and perlorms whatever pro1 of ils puq)ose
remains meaninghd.
(For example, a hmction in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. ThereR)re, Subsection 2d
requires that any applicalion-supplied lunction or table used by this lunction must
be oplionah if the application does ]lot supply it, lhe square root function musl still
compute square rools.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. [f identifiable sections of
thai work are not derived from lhe Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do ]lot
apply to lhose seclions when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, lhe
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions lk)r
olher licensees extend to the entire whole, and lhus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
wrillen entirely by you; ralher, the intent is to exercise the right to control lfie
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
hi additiom mere aggB:gation of another work not based on the Library with the Library
(or with a work based on lhe Library) on a vohmle of a storage or distribulion medium
does ]lot bring the other work under lhe scope of INs License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of lhe ordinary GNU General Public License
instead oflhis License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you musl alter all
lfie nolices that relcr to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General
Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (lf a newer version than
version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appemx:& then you can
specify thai version instead if you wish.) Do ]lot make any other change ill these
ilolices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, il is irreversible lor that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works
made lrom that copy.
This option is usefill when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library inlo a
program thai is ]lot a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of ih under
Seclion 2) in object code or execulable lorm under the terms of Sections I and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Seclions 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used R)r software inlerchange.
[f distribution of object code is made by oil)ring access to copy h'om a designated
place, then ollering equivalent access to copy lfie source code lrom the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though lhird pmlies are ]lot
compelled to copy the source along with the ot)iecl code.
5. A program lhat contains no derivative of any porlion of lhe Library, but is designed
to work wilfi the Library by being compiled or linked with ih is called a "work that
uses the Library". Such a work, in isolaliom is ]lot a derivalive work of the Library,
and there*hre hdls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable
lhat is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
lhan a "work that uses the library". The executable is lhere*k)re covmvd by this License.
Section 6 states terms lk)r distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material lrom a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code *k}rlhe work may be a derivative work of the Library even
lhough the source code is nol. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Librau, or if the work is dself a library. The lhreshold fi)r
lhis to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an ot_iect file uses only numerical parameters, dala structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline funclions (ten lines or less in length), lhen
lhe use of lfie object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether il is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing INs ot_iect code plus pollions of lhe Library will slill
1:111under Section b.)
Olherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the objecl code
h}r the work under the terms of Section 6. Any execulables containing that work also
lall under Section 6_ whether or not they are linked dil_ctly with lhe Library itselE
6. As an exception to lhe Sections above, you ]nay also combine or link a 'work that
uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permd modificalion of the work h}r the customer's own use and reverse
engineering *hr debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in
it and lhat the Library and its use are covered by INs License. You musl supply a copy
of lhis License. lfthe work during execution displays copyrighl notices, you musl
include the copyright notice R)r the Library among lhem, as well as a refi_Jvnce
directing lhe user to lhe copy of INs License. Also. you must do one of these lhings:
a) Accompany the work wilh the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code lk)rthe Library inchlding whatever changes were used in the work
(which must be distributed under Sections 1and 2 above); and, if the work is an
executable linked with lhe Library, with the complete machineqvadable "work
thai uses the Library'2 as object code and/or source code, so that the user can
modily the Library and lhen relink to produce amodified executable conlaining
the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents
of definilions files in the Library will nol necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mectmnism lot linking with the Library. A
suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already
present on lhe user's computer system, rather than copying library lunctions
inlo the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of lhe
library, if lhe user inslalls one, as long as lhe modified version is interface-
compalible with the version lhat the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written ofter, valid lot at least three years, to give
the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, lor a charge no
more lhan the cost of perfi_rming this distribulion.
d) If distribution of the work is made by oftering access to copy h'om a designated
place, oll)r equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from lhe
same place.
e) Verily that the user has ahvady received a copy of these materials or thal you
have ahvady sent this user acopy.
For an executable, lfie required lorm of lhe "work thai uses the Library" must include
any data and utility programs needed lk)r reproducing the executable lrom it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (ill either source or binary R)rm) with the major components
(compiler, kernel and so on) of the operaling system on which the executable runs,
unless that component ilself accompanies the executable.
[1may happen that this requirement contradicls lhe license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries lfiat do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use bolh them and lhe Library together ill an execulable
lhat you distribute.
7. You ]nay place library facilities that alv a work based on lhe Library side-by-side in
a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that lfie separate distribution of the
work based on the Library and of the other library lacilities is olherwise permitted,
and provided thai you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined wilh any other library lacildies. This must be distributed
under the terms of lhe Seclions above.
III
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the [act that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
UliCOlllbined lorm of lhe same work.
8. You nlay not copy, nlodiI3;, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as
expressly provided under this License. Any altempl otherwise to copy, nlodiI3;,
sublicense_ link with_ or distribute tile Library is void, and will autonlatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, lrom you under this License will nol have their licenses
terminated so long as such pallies remain in lull compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed il. However,
nothing else grants you permission to modiI3; or distribute the Library or its
derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Theretk)re, by modi[ying or distributing the Library (or any work based on
the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
and conditions fi_r copying, distributing or modit3;ing the Library or works ba_d
on it.
I0. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modil3; the Library sut_iect to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of tile rights
granted herein. You are not responsible Rir enfflrcing compliance by third parties
will1 this License.
I1. If, as a consequence of a corn1 judgment or allegation of patent infringement or Rir
any other mason (not limited to patent issuesL conditions am imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
lhis License, they do nol excuse you from the conditions of lhis License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisly simultaneously your obligations under lhis License
and any other perlinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute
the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-flee
redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies direcdy or indirectly
lhrough you, then lhe only way you could satisly bolh it and lhis License would be
to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any pollion of this section is held invalid or unenRirceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to inlringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the flee software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to tile wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute soltware through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
12. ff the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in cerlain countries either
by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
the Libra U under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Sol[ware Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
l_sser General Public License h'om lime to time. Such new versions will be similar
in spirit to the present version, bul may dilli:r in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each verskm is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the
option of lollowing the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Libra U does not speciI3; a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Sol[ware Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other flee programs whose
distribution conditions am incompatible with these, write to the author to ask Ik)r
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Sol[ware Foundation: we sometimes make exceptions k)r this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the flee slams of all
derivatives of our fi'ee software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of sofhvare
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSE[) FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATE[) IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY ++ASIS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIN[), EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, [NCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AN[) FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AN[)
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERV[CING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRE[) BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREE[)
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR RED[STR[B UTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER SOPTWAREL EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AN[) CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be (if the D_:atest possible use to the
public, we recommend making it free soBware that everyone can redistribute and
change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these tenns (or, alternalively,
under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the hfllowing notices to the library. It is sail:st to attach
them to the start of each source file to mosl effl:ctively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright' line and a pointer to where
the lull notice is fi}und.
<one line to give lhe library's name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C)
<year> <ilame of aulhor>
This library is lree software; you can redistribute it and/or modi[y it under the terms
of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation: either version 2 (if the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public
License lot more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along
with this library; if nok write to the Free Software Foundatiom Inc., 59 Temple
Place, Suite 33(k Bostom MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add infflrmation on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school if
any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" lot the library, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the ilames:
Yoyodyne, lnc., heJx:by disclaims all copyright intro,:st in the library _Frob' (a
library lot tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coom President (if Vice
That's all there is to d!
About Fusion
DirectFB Fusion kernel module: introduction and API
by Niels Roest
Copyright (C) 2(tl)9 Niels RI_st
This documentation is lree softwmx:: you can redistribute it and/or modily it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Soltware Foundation: either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be usehlL but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY: without even the implied warranty (if
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License lor more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this
program; if noh write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
For more details see the file COPYING in the source distribution of Linux.
About openssl
Copyright ((') 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights ix:served.
Redistribution and use in source and binary t_)rms, with or without modificatiom are
permitted provided that the k)llowing conditions are met:
I. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the fi_llowing disclaimer.
2. 2. Redistributions in binary Ik)rm must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the Ik)llowing disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning Ii:atnres or use of this software musl display
the Iollowing acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Pr(_iect fi_r use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.opensshorg/)"
4. The names "()pelISSL ToolkiP' and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-com@opensshorg.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names withoul prior written pemlission of the OpenSSL
Project.
6. Redistributions of any klrm whatsoever must retain the k!llowing
acknowledgment:
_This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Pr(_iect lot use ill the
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
iv
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCL1JD[N& BUT NOT LIMITED
T(k THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS (ONTR[BUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED T(k PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITIJTE GOODS OR SERVICES: LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISE[) OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software wrillen by Eric Young
([email protected]). This product includes software wrillen by Tim Hudson
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is all SSL implenlentation writlen by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to confilrm with Nelscapes SSL.
This library is lree lot commercial and non-conmlercial use as long as the k)llowing
conditions are aheared to. The fi)llowing conditions apply to all code louiid in Ibis
distribution, be it lhe RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by lhe same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices ill the code are not
to be removed. If this package is used ill a produch Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of lhe parts of the library used. This can be in the fibrin of a
textual message at program staflup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary f)rms, with or withoul modification, are
per]hilled provided that the [ollowing conditions are met:
I. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the l_ollowing disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary lorm must reproduce the above copyright notice, this lisl
of conditions and the lkfllowing disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning l_alures or use of this soltware must display
lhe lollowing acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic sol[ware written by Eric Young
([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be lef oul if the rouines lrom
the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specilic code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include all acknowledgement:
"This product includes sol[ware written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]]n)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AN[) ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED T(k THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AN[) FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
([NCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES: LOSS OF USL DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSE[) AN[) ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSI BIL[TY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms lk)r any publically available version or derivative of
this code cannot be changed, i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under
another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
About zlib
Copyright notice:
(C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This sofware is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable tk)rany damages arising h'om the use of this sofware.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this sol[ware fi)r any puq)ose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute il freely, sut)iect to the
tkfllowing restrictions:
I. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not clair]] that you
wrote the original sol[ware. If you use this software ill a product, an
acknowledgment ill the producl documentation would be appreciated bul is rlol
required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original sofware.
3. This notice may not be removed or allured from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
[email protected] madler @alumni.caltech.edu
If you use lhe zlib library ill a product, we would apl)reciate *not ,_receiving lenglhy
legal documents to sign. The sources are provided fi)r thee but withoul warranty of any
kind. The library has been entirely writlen by Jeanqoup Gailly and Mark Adler: it does
not include third-pafly code.
If you redistribute modifed sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file
ChangeLog history int_}rmation documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ tk)r
more information on the distribution of modified source versions.
About FreeType
The FreeType Project LICENSE
2fifi6-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2fi02_ 2{)(}6by
[)avid Turner, Robert Wilhehn, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
The FmeType Prc_iect is distributed ill several archive packages: some of them may
contain, ill addition to the FreeType fi)nt engine, various tools and contribulions which
rely om or relate to, the FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files lkmnd ill such packages, and which do not hdl under their
own explicit license. The license all)cts thus the FreeType [ont engine, the test
program& documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and [JG (Independent JPEG Group)
licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of [ree sol[ware ill commercial and
h'eeware products alike. As a consequence, ils main points am that:
o We don'l promise that lhis software works. However, we will be interested ill any
kind of bug reports. Uas is' distribution)
o You carl use this software tk}rwhatever you wanh in parts or hill fi)r]m without
having to pay us. ('royalty-[ree' usage)
o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only paris of it, in
a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentalion lhat you have
used the FreeType code. Ccredits')
We specifically per]nit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or withoul
modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The
FreeType Prc{iect and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us [or a prelerred lorm li)r a creditMisclaimer to use ill
compliance wilh Ibis license. We lhus encourage you to use lhe l_fllowing text:
Portions of this soflwmv are copyright (C) <year> The FiveType Prc_iect
(www.[reetype.org). All rights reserved.
Please ivplace <year> with the value [rom the FreeType version you actually use.
l_gal Terms
0. Definitions
Throughout this license, the terms 'package', 'FreeType Project2 and 'FreeType
archive' mti_r to the set of files originally distributed by the authors ([)avid Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the 'FreeType Project', be they named as
alpha, beta or final release.
'You' refi:rs to the licensee, or person using the pr{_iect, where 'using' is a generic term
including compiling the prc{iect's source code as well as linking it to fi)rm a 'program'
or 'executable'. This program is refi:rred to as 'a program using the FreeType engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original FmeType ProjecL including
all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise slated ill the file ill its
original, unmodified tk)rm as distributed ill the original archive. If you are unsure
whether or not a particular file is covered by Ibis license, you must contact us to verily
lhis.
The FmeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2fi(,q) by [)avid Turner, Robert Wilhelm,
and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below.
1. No Warranty
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED %S IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, [NCLUDIN& BUT NOT LIMITED
T(k WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE
USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-lree, perpetual and irrevocable right and
license to use, execute, perfl.}rm, co]npile, display, copy, create derivative works oL
distribute and sublicense the FmeType Project (ill both source and ot_iect code fi)r]ns)
and derivative works thereof tk)r any purpose; and to authori/e olhers to exercise some
or all of the rights granted heroin, subject to the lifllowing conditions:
o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file ('FTL.TXT') unaltered;
any additions, deletions or changes to tile original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files
]nusl be preserved in all copies of source files.
o Redistribution in binary lk)rm musl provide a disclaimer that states that the sol[ware
is based in part of the work of the FreeType Tea]m ill the distribution documentation.
We also encourage you to put an URL to the FmeType web page ill your
documenlation, though Ibis isn'l mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Prc{iect,
not just the umnodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However,
no lee need be paid to us.
3. Adverlising
Neither lhe FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other
lot commercial advertising, or promotional purposes withoul specific prior written
permission.
We suggest, bul do not require, that you use one or morn of the [ollowing phrases to
ruler to lhis software in your documentation or advertising materials: 'FreeType
Pr{_iect', 'FreeType Engine2 'FreeType library', or 'FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the
FreeType Project is copyrighted material only this license, or another one contracted
with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modit3; it. Therefi)re, by
using, distributing, or modit3;ing the FreeType Projech you indicate thai you understand
and accepl all the terms of Ibis license.
4. Contacts
There are two mailing lisls related to FreeType:
V
o fleet ype @nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as luture and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you are k)oking lk}r support, start in lhis list if
you haven't lk)und anything to help you in lhe doculnentation.
o fleet ype-devel@ nongnu.org
Discusses bug& as well as engine internals, design issues, specifc licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be f)und at
hlll)://www .freetype.org
About Expat
Copyright ((') 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Soltware ('enter Lid
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (C) 2(}01_ 2t)(}2, 2(}03_ 2t)(}4, 2(}05_ 21)(}6Expal maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentatkm files (the "Software"), to deal in the Soltware
without restrictkm, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, nlodily, ]nerge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Soltware is lumished to do so, subject to the lollowing conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Soltware.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIN[), EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICIILAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
About cURL, libcurl
COPYRIGHT AN[) PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (C) 1996 - 2009, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modily, and distribute this soltware tbr any purpose wilh or
without Ice is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS 1S'2 WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIN[L EXPRESS OR IMPLIE[L INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE (-)R OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Excepl as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
adveciising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in INs Software
withoul prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
About Independent JPEG Group's software, libjpeg
hi phdn English:
1. We don't pronfise that this software works. (But if you find any bugs_ please let us
know!)
2. You can use this software lot whatever you want. You don'l have tO pay US.
3. You nlay not pretend that you wrote this soltware. If you use it in a program, you
must acknowledge sonlewhem in your documentation that you've used the IJG code.
hi legalese:
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation, either express or implied, wilh
respect to this software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fimess lk}ra particular
purpose. This soltware is provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire risk as
to ils quality and accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-20(N, Thonlas G. Lane, Guido Vollbeding.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modily, and distribute this software (or
portions thereol) lor any purpose, without lee, sut_iect to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code lbr this sollware is distribute& then this README file
must be included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered: and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files nmst be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the accompanying documentation must
state thai "this soltware is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group".
(3) Permission tbr use of this software is granted only if the user accepts lull
responsibility lk}r any undesirable consequences: the authors accept NO LIABILITY lk)r
damages of any kind.
These conditions npply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code, not just
to the unnlodified library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted lbr the use of any IJG author's name or company name in
adverlising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it. This
software may be refl:rred to only as "the Independent JPEG Group's software".
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of
conlmercial producls, provided thai all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the
product vendor.
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribution by pemfission of L. Peter Deutsch, sole
proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin Enter:irises of Menlo Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is
NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions, but instead by the usual
distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation; principally, that you must include
source code if you redistribute it. {See lhe file ansi2knr.c tbr full details.) However,
since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any program generated from the [JG code, lhis
does not lilnit you more than the f)regoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script "configure" was produced with GNU Autoconf. It is
copyright by the Free Software Foundalkm bul is lreely distributable. The same holds
Ibr its supporting scripts (config.guess, config.sub, ltmain.sh). Another support scriph
install-sh, is copyright by X Consortium but is also lreely distributable.
The [JG distribution Ik}rmerly included code to read and write GIF files. To avoid
entanglement with the Unisys LZW patenf GIF reading support has been removed
altogether, and the GIF writer has been sinll)lified to produce "uncomplvssed GIFs'.
This technique does not use the LZW algorithm; the resulting GIF files are larger than
usual, but are ivadable by all standard GIF decoders.
We are requilvd to state that
"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
ConlpuServe hlcorporated."
About International Components for Unicode
ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later
COPYRIGHT AN[) PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (C) 1995-2003 International Business Machines Corporation and others
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining acopy of this
soltware and associated documentation files (the "Software'), to deal in the Soltware
without restriction, inchlding without limitation the rights to use, copy, modily_ merge_
publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is lurnished to do so, provided that the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that bolh lhe above copyright
notice(s) and this pernfission nolice appear in supporting docunlentation.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS 1S'2 WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIN[L EXPRESS OR [MPLIE[L INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS
NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE
OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice_ the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
adveciising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in INs Softwm_
withoul prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned heJ_in are the property of their
respective owllers.
About libpng
This copy of the libpng notices is pro,,ided fir your con,,enience. In case of any
discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h thai is included in the
fbpng distribuliom the latter shall pmvaih
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modity libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this
sentence. This code is released under the libpng license.
fbpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.47_ February 18_2t)12, are
Copyright (C) 20114, 2(10h-2009 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according
to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added
to the lisl of Contribuling Authors
Cosmin Tmta
libpng versions 1.(1.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3_ 2{)02, are Copyright
(C) 2000-2(}02 Glenn Randers-Pehrsom and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.(}.6 with the lk)llowing individuals added to the
list of Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollanl
and with the lk}llowing additions to the disclainler:
Them is no warranty against interfl:rence with your mXioyment of the library or
against infringement. There is no warranty that our ellk)rts or the libra U will lulfill
any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire risk of satislactory quality, perf)rmance, accuracy, and eff)rt is with
lhe user.
fbpng versions 0.97_ January 1998, through 1.0.6_ March 2(}, 2(100_ are Copyright (C)
1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, wifll the lolL)wing individuals added to the lisl of
Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions (}.89_ June 1996, through 0.96_ May 1997, are Copyright (C) 1996_ 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to lhe same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the lisl of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Hohngren
vi
Greg Roelols
Tom Taliner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995_ through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (C) 1995_
1996 Guy Eric Schalnah Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the
fi_llowing set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
[)ave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group
42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitaliom the
warranties of merchantability and of fitness Ik)r any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42_ Inc. assume no liability fi_r dfi_:ct, indirech incidental special
exemplary, or consequential damages, which may ix:suit from the use of the PNG
ReteJ_:nce Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and dislribute this source code, or
portions hereof, lor any purpose, without Ice, subject to the I_ollowing restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be mislx:presented
as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be ix:moved or altered lrom any source or altered
source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42_ file. specifically permik without Ice, and
encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file Ik_rmal
in commercial products. If you use this source code in a produch acknowledgment is
not l_:quired but would be appreciated.
A "png getcopyright" lunction is available, Ik)r convenient use ill "about" boxes and
the like:
printl ("c7_s",png_getcopyright(N UL L) );
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG fi_rmat, of course) is supplied ill the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbardpg (88x31 ) and "pngnow.png" (98x31 ).
Libpng is OS[ Certified Open Source Soltware. OSI Cmlified Open Source is a
ceJlification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourcetk)rge.nel
February 18, 2012
About gSOAP
gSOAP Public License
Version 1.3b
The gSOAP public license is derived l?om the Mozilla Public License (MPLI .I ). The
sections that were deleted
from the original MPLI.I text are 1.0.1, 2.1.(c),(d), 2.2.(c),(d), 8.2.(b), 10, and 11.
Section 3.8 was added. The
modified sections are 2.1.(b), 2.2.(b), 3.2 (simplified), 3.5 (deleted the last sentence),
and 3.6 (simplified).
This license applies to the gSOAP software package, with the exception of the wsdl2h
source code located in
gsoap/wsdL all code generated by wsdl2h, the UDDI source code gsoap/uddi2, and the
Web server sample
source code samples/webserver. To use all of the soltware commercially, a commercial
license has to be obtained
froll/www.genivia.com.
1 DEFINITIONS.
1.(L 1.
I.]. _Contributor" means each entdy that creates or contributes to the creation of
Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code_ prior
Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular
Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code, or Modifications or the combination (if
the Original Code, and Modifications, in each case including pollions thereof.
1.4. '%lectronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted ill
the software development community fi_r the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. '%xecutable" means Covered Code in any lorm other than Source Code.
1.6. '%trial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial
Deveklper in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines (overed Code or pollions thereof
with code not governed by the terms of this License.
1.8. '%icense" means this document.
1.8.1. _Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible,
whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights
conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or stnlcture
(if either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is
released as a series of files, a Modification is: A.
Any addition to or deletion fi'om the contents (If a file containing Original Code or
previous Modifications. B.
Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code, or previous Modifications.
I. 10. _Original Code" means Source Code of computer soltware code which is
described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which,
at the time (if its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by
this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patenl claim(s), now owned or herealter acquired,
including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent
Licensable by grantor.
http://w ww.cs.l su.edu/~ engelen/license.html
1.11. _Source Code" means the preti:rred fi_rm of the Covm_:d Code lor making
modifications to ih including all modules it contains, plus any associated intertace
definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation (if an Executable, or
source code dilt;zJ_:ntial comparisons against either the Original Code or another well
known, avaihtfile Covm_:d Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in
a compressed or archival fi_rm, provided the appropriate decomplx:ssion or de-archiving
soltware is widely available fi_r no charge.
1.12. _You" (or _Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under,
and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a hlture version (if this License
issued under Section 6.1. For legal entities, "Yotf' includes any entity which controls, is
controlled by, or is under common control with You. For pml>oses of this definition,
_control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management
of such entity, whether by contracl or otherwise, or (b) ownership (if more than fifty
percent (5090 (if the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entdy.
2 SOURCE (;()DE LICENSE.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer heJx:by grants You a world-
wide, royalty-lree, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property
clafins:
(a)
under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial
Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, pertklrm, sublicense and distribute the
Original Code (or porfions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a
Larger Work; and
(b)
under patents now or hereafter owned or controlled by Initial [)eveloper, to make, have
made, use and sell ('k!lt;zr to sell and imporl") the Original Code, Modifications, or
porlions thereof, bul solely to the extent thai any such patent is reasonably necessary to
enable You to utilize, alone or in combination with other software, the Original Code,
Modifications, or any combination or portions thereof.
(c)
(d)
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Sut_ject to third party intellectual properly claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a
world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license
(a)
under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by
Contributor, to use, reproduce, modiI3,, display, perfi_rm, sublicense and distribute the
Modifications created by such Contributor (or porlions thereof) either on an unmodified
basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as pro1 of a Larger Work; and
(b)
under patents now or hereafter owned or controlled by ContribuRm to make, have
made, use and sell ('k)lt;zr to sell and impo11;') the Contributor Version (or portions
thereof), but solely to the extent thai any such patent is reasonably necessary to enable
You to utilize, alone or in combination with other software, the Contributor Version (or
pollions thereof).
(c)
(d)
3 DISTRIBUTION OBLIGATIONS.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute am governed by the
terms of this License, including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code
version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a
luture version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy
of this License with every copy of the Source (?ode You distribute. You may not otti:r
or inpose any terms on any Source (?ode version that alters or restricts the applicable
version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include
an additional document olI;:ring the additional rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification created by You will be provided to the Initial Developer in Source
Code lorm and are sut_ject to the terms of the License.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause aft Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file
documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any
change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived,
directly or indirectly, from Original (?ode provided by the Initial Developer and
including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice
ill an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or
ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters.
(a) Third Party Clafins.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property
rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1
or 2.2, Contributor must include a texl file with the Source Code distribution titled
_LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making tile claim in sul ficient detail
that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after
the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall
promptly modiI 3, the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter
and shall take other steps (such as notit3dng appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inlorm those who received the Covered Code that new
knowledge has been obtained.
(b) Conlributor APls.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interlace and
Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to
implement that APL Contributor must also include this inlormation in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
vii
Contributor represents thaL except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above,
Contributor believes that Contributor's Modifications am Contributor's ()riginal
creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient righls to granl the rights conveyed by this
License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice hi Exhibit A hi each file of the Source Code. If it is nol
possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You
must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would
be likely to look [or such a notice. If You created one or more Modifcation(s) You may
add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also
duplicate this License in any documentation lk)r the Source Code where You describe
recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to
oil)r, and to charge a lee f}r, warranty, support, indemnity or liabilily obligalions to
one or ii/ore recipients of Covelvd (-'()de. However, You may do so oilly on Your own
behalL and not on behalf of the Initial Deveh)per or any Contributor.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable f_rm only if the requil_menls of
Section 3. 1-3.5 have been met hot that Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your
choice, which may contain terms dill)rent h'om this License, provided that You am in
compliance with the terms of this License and that the license R)r lhe Executable
version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipienFs rights in the Source Code
version f'om tile rights set R)llh hi this License. If You distribute the Executable version
under a di[lerent license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which dill)r
[rom this License am ollered by You alone, not by the [nilial Developer or any
Contributor. If you distribute executable versions containing Covered Code as part of a
produch you must reproduce the notice in Exhibit B in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the product.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combhling Covered Code with other code not
governed by the temls of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single
product, hi such a case, You must make sure tile requirements of this License are
[ulfilled ff)r the Covered Code.
3.8. Restrictions.
You may not remove any product identification, copyright, proprietary notices or labels
[rom gSOAP.
4 INABILITY TO COMPLY DUE TO STATUTE OR REGULATION.
lfil is inlpossible t_drYou to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect
to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You
must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and
(b) describe the limitations and the code they all)el. Such description must be included
in the LEGAL file described ill Section 3.4 and must be hlcluded with all distributions
of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must bc sullicienfly detailed R)r a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to
understand it.
5 APPLICATION OF THIS LICENSE.
This License applies to code to which the [nilial Developer has atlached the notice in
Exhibit A and to related Covered Code.
6 VERSIONS OFTHE LICENSE.
6.1. New Versions.
Grantor may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time.
Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. E[lect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You
]nay always continue to use it under the terms of lhat version. You may also choose to
use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a nlodified version of this License (which you may (lilly do ill order
to apply it to code which is not ahvady Covered Code governed by this License), You
must (a) rename Your license so that the phrase "gSOAP" or any confllsingly similar
phrase do ]lot appear in your license (except to note that your license di[fi_rs from this
License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms
which di[fl_r fi'om the gSOAP Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial
Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall ]lot
of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIN[), WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY RIGHTS, AND ANY WARRANTY THAT MAY ARISE BY REASON
OF TRADE USAGE, CUSTOM, OR COURSE OF DEALING. WITHOUT
LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE SOFTWARE
IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THAT THE AUTHORS DO NOT WARRANT THE
SOFTWARE WILL RUN UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. LIMITED
LIABILITY THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE
AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIN[) OR NATURE
WHATSOEVER, WHETHER BASE[) ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATE[) TO THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF THE
AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED ON THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE
OR IF SUCH DAMAGE COULD HAVE BEEN REASONABLY FORESEEN, AN[)
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED. SUCH LIMITATION ON DAMAGES
INCLUDES, B UT IS NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA OR SOFTWARE, WORK STOPPAGE,
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR IMPAIRMENT OF OTHER
GOODS. IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR THE COSTS OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES. YOU
ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT DESIGNED FOR USE IN ON-
LINE EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS SUCH AS OPERATION
OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFt NAVIGATION OR CONTROL, OR LIFE-
CRITICAL APPLICATIONS. THE AUTHORS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY
LIABILITY RESULTING FROM USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY SUCH ON-
LINE EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS AN[) ACCEPTS NO
LIABILITY IN RESPECT OF ANY ACTIONS OR CLAIMS BASE[) ON THE USE
OF THE SOFTWARE IN ANY SUCH ON-LINE EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTS BY YOU. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS PARAGRAPH, THE
TERM "LIFE- CRITICAL APPLICATION" MEANS AN APPLICATION IN
WHICH THE FUNCTIONING OR MALFUNCTIONING OF THE SOFTWARE
MAY RESULT DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN PHYSICAL INJURY OR LOSS
OF HUMAN LIFE. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN
ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS
AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8 TERMINATION.
8.1.
This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You hul to
comply with terms herein and hill to cure such breach within 3(} days of beco]ning
aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted
shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their natnre, musl
remain in eltisct beyond the terminalion of this License shall survive.
8.2.
8.3.
If You assert a patent inlringement claim against Pmlicipant alleging that such
Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly inffhlges any patent where such
claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the iniliation of patent
inlringement litigation, then lhe reasonable value of the licenses granted by such
Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken hlto accounl hi determhling tile
amouiIt or value of ally payment or license.
8.4.
hi the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license
agreements (excluding dislributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by
You or any distributor hereunder prior to termhlation shall survive termhlation.
9 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL
YOIL THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY
DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH
PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AN[)
ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY
SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR
DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH
LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS
EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10 U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
11 MISCELLANEOUS.
12 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between hlitial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible lk_rclaims
and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this
License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute
such responsibility on an equdable basis. Nothhlg herein is hltended or shall be deemed
to constdnte any admission of liability.
EXHIBIT A.
"The contents of this file are subject to the gSOAP Public License Version 1.3 (the
"License"); you may not use this
file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://w w w.cs.l su.edu/engelen/soaplicense.bt ml
Sol[ware distributed under the License is distributed oil an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the
specific language governing rights and limitations under the License.
The Original Code of the gSOAP Sol[ware is: stdsoap.h, stdsoap2.h, stdsoap.c,
stdsoap2.c, stdsoap.cpp,
stdsoap2.cpp, soapcpp2.h, soapcpp2.c, soapcpp2 lex.1, soapcpp2 yacc.y, error2.h,
error2.c, symbol2.c, init2.c,
soapdoc2.htmL and soapdoc2.pd[, hllpget.h, httpget.c, sthh, stldeque.h, stllist.h,
stlvector.h, stlset.h.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Robert A. van Engelen. Portions created
by Robert A. van Engelen are
Copyright (C) 2(DI-2004 Roberl A. van Engelen, Genivia hie. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s):
.,,
[Note: The text ol this Exhibit A mav dill)r slightlv thrm the text of the notices ill the
Source Code files of the Original code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather
than the text lk_und hi the Orighlal Code Source Code R)r Your Modifications.]
EXHIBIT B.
"Pro1of the sot[warn embedded hi this product is gSOAP software.
VIII
Portions clvated by gSOAP are Copyright (C) 2001-2009 Robert A. vail Engelem
Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN
PART PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AN[) ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES: LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AN[) ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE."
htlp://www.cs.lsu.edu/-engelen/license.ht nfl
About gcc libgcc, gcc libstdc++
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2t)(}7
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Soltware Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org]>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a flee, copylelt license lbr soltware and other
kinds of works.
The licenses fi_r most soltware and other practical works are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your lreedonl to share and change all versions of a
program--to make sure it remains lree software fi)r all ils users. We, the Free Software
Foundation, use the GNU General Public License lor most of our soltware: it applies
also to ally other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your
programs, too.
When we speak of fi'ee soltware, we are relerring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the fi'eedom to distribute
copies of fi'ee soltware (and charge fi_rthem if you wish), lhat you receive source code
or call get it if you want ih that you call change the software or use pieces of it ill new
free programs, and that you know you call do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you lhese rights or
askfilg you to surrender the rights. Therelore, you have certain responsibilities if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modil3; it: responsibilities to respecl the
freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or lot a lee,
you must pass (m to the recipients the same lreedonls thal you received. You musl
make sure that they, too, receive or call get the source code. And you must show lhem
these terms so they know their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) olI)r you lhis License giving you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or nlodiI3; it.
For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no
warranty lot this lree soltware. For both users' and authors' sake, the GPL requires that
modified verskms be marked as changed, so that their problems will nol be attributed
erroneously to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of
the software inside them, alfl_ough the manufi_cturer can do so. This is Nndamentally
incompatible with the aim of pr()tecting users' lreedom to change the sollware. The
systematic pattern of such abuse occurs ill lhe mva of products lor individuals to use,
which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therelolv, we have designed this
version of the GPL to prohibit the practice lor those products. If such problems arise
substantially in other domains, we stand ivady to extend this provision to those domains
in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by soflwmv patents. States should ]lot
allow patents to restrict development and use of sot}ware on general-purpose
computers, but ill those thai do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied
to a free program could make it elt)ctively proprietary. To prevent INs, the GPL
assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-lree.
The plvcise terms and conditions fi_r copying, distribution and modification Ibllow.
TERMS AN[) CONDITIONS
O. Definitions.
"This License" refi:rs to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
"CopyrighP' also means copyrightqike laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as
semiconductor masks.
"The Program" rulers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each
licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and "recipients" may be individuals or
organizatiolis.
To "modiI_¢" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion
requiring copyright permission, other than the making of all exact copy. The resulting
work is called a "modified version" of the earlier work or a work "based o]P' the earlier
work.
A "covered work*' means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the
Program.
To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would
make you directly or secondarily liable fi_r infrfilgenlenl under applicable copyright
law, except executing it (m a computer or modilying a private copy. Propagation
includes copyfilg, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
public, and ill some countries other activities as well.
To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make
or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user lhrough a computer network, with no
transfi:r of a copy, is ]lot conveyfilg.
An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate l_gal Notices" to the extent that it
includes a convenient and prominently visible leamre that (1) displays all appropriate
copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that theJ_ is no warranty lot the work (except to
the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this
License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the inlerfitce presents a list of user
commands or optJolis, such as a mellu, a prominelit item ill the list meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The "source code" fi_r a work means the prelcnvd R)rm of the work R)r making
modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source lorm of a work.
A "Standard Interface" means an intmqace that either is all official standard defined by
a recogni/ed standards body, or, ill the case of interfaces specified fi_r apmlicular
programmfilg language, one that is widely used among developers workfilg in that
language.
The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work
as a whole, that (a) is inchlded ill the normal fi)rm of packaging a Major Componenh
but which is not part of that M_tior Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the
work with that Mnjor Componenh or to implement a Standard Interface fior which an
implementation is available to the public ill source code lorm. A "M_tior Component",
ill this contexL means a m_tior essential coml)onent (kernel, window system, and so on)
of the specific ()perating system (if ally) on which the executable work runs, or a
compiler used to produce the work, or all object code interpreter used to run it.
The "Corresponding Source" lor a work ill ot)iect code lorm means all the source code
needed to generate, inslalL and (lor an executable work) run the ot_iect code and to
modily the work, including scripts to control those aclivities. However, it does nol
include the work's System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available
lree programs which alv used unmodified ill perfi.}rmfilg those activities bul which are
not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interlace definition
files associated with source files Ibr lhe work, and the source code lor shared libraries
and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
such as by intimate data communication or control llow between those subprograms
and other parts of the work.
The Convsponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate
automatically lrom other parts of the Correspondfilg Source.
The Convsponding Source lor a work ill source code fibrin is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted fi_r the ternl of copyright on the
Program, and am irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License
explicdly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The
output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given
its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of tair
use or other equivalenh as provided by copyrighl law.
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without
conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in fierce. You may convey covered
works to others tk}rthe sole purpose of having then] make modifications exclusively fk}r
you, or provide you with lacilifies lor running those works, provided that you comply
with tile terms of this License in co]weying all material lot which you do ]lot control
copyright. Those thus making or nmning the covered works R)r you must do so
exclusively on your behaB, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit
lhem lrom makfilg ally copies of your copyrighted material outside their l_lalionship
witb you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under lhe conditions
stated below. Sublicensing is ]lot allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvenfion Law.
No covered work shall be deemed pail of an effi:ctive technological measure under
ally applicable law fidfilling obligations under article 11 of the WlPO copyright treaty
adopted on 2(}December 1996, or similar laws prohibitfilg or restricting circumvention
of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive ally legal power to lbrbid circumvention
of lechnoh)gical measures to tile extent such circumvention is eft)cted by exercisfilg
rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclafin ally
intention to limit operatkm or modification of the work as ameans of enlorcfilg, against
lhe work's users, your or lhird parties' legal rights to fi_rbid circumvention of
technok)gical measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
ix
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices staling that this License and any
non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code: keep intact all
notices (if the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy (if this License
ahmg with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price tbr each copy that you convey, and you may
olti2r support or warranty protection lor a ti2e.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from
the Program, in the thrm of source code under the terms (If section 4, provided thai you
also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices statflg that you modified ih and giving a
relevanl date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under INs License
and any conditions added under section
7. This requilx2ment modifies the requirement in section 4 to "keep intact all notices".
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who
comes into possession of a copy. This License will therethre apply, along with any
applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
regardless of how they am packaged. This License gives no permission to license the
work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately
received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal
Notices: however, if the Program has interactive inteJ_laces that do not display
Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which
are not by their nature extensions (If the covered work, and which are not combined
with it such as to Rlrm a larger program, in or on a volume (if a storage or distribution
medium, is called an %ggmgate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
used to limit the access or legal rights (if the compilation's users beyond what the
individual works permil. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause
this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work ill ot)ject code lorm under the terms of sections 4 and
5_provided that you also convey the machine-readable Convsponding Source under the
terms (if this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code im or embodied im a physical product (including a
physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fxed on a
durable physical medium customarily used lot software inlerchange.
b) Convey the ot)ject code in, or embodied in, a physical product (inchlding a
physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written ofti2r, valid lot at least three
years and valid lbr as long as you oiler spare parts or customer suppofl lbr that product
model to give anyone who possesses the object code eilher (1) a copy (If the
Corresponding Source fer all the software in the product that is covered by this License,
on a durable physical medium customarily used lor soltware inlerchange, fer aprice no
more than your reasonable cost of physically perRirming this conveying of source, or
(2) access to copy the Corresponding Source lhom a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy (if the written ofler to
provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed (lilly occasionally and
noncommercially, and
(lilly if you received the ot)iect code with such an olli2r, in accord with subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by olti2ring access lrom a designated place (gratis or lor a
charge), and oiler equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way
through the same place at no filrther charge. You need not l_2quire l_2cipients to copy
the Corg2sponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object
code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a ditti2rent server
(operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying tacilities, provided
you maintain clear directions next to the ot_iect code saying where to find the
Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you
remain obligated to ensure that it is available fer as long as needed to satisfy, these
requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmissiom provided you int_orm
other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being
olli2md to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.
A separable portion (If the object code, whose source code is excluded f'om the
Con'esponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the
ot_iect code work.
A %Jser Product" is either (l) a _consumer product", which means any tangible
personal property which is normally used thr personal, lamily, or household purposes,
or (2) anything designed or sold lor incorporation into a dwelling. [n determining
whether aproduct is a consumer product, doubthd cases shall be resolved in favor of
coverage. For a particular product received by aparticular user, "normally used" refers
to a typical or common use (if that class of producL regardless of the status of the
particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is
expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the
product has subslaiitial comnlercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses
represent the only significant mode (if use of the product.
_lnstallalion Inlormation" lbr a User Product means any methods, procedtm2s,
authorization keys, or other inlormalion required to install and execute modified
versions of a covered work in that User Product lhom a modified version of its
Corresponding Source. The inlormalion must sulfce to ensure that the continued
functioning (if the modified object code is in no case prevenled or inlerti2md with solely
because modification has been made.
[f you convey an object code work under this section im or wilh, or specifically fer use
im a User Produch and lhe conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right
(if possession and use of the User Product is translerred to the recipient in perpetuity or
l_ara fixed term (regardless (if how the transaction is characteri/ed), the Corresponding
Source conveyed under this section nmst he accompanied by the Installation
lntk_rmation. Bul lhis requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party
retains the ability to install modified ot)iect code on the User Product (Rir example_ the
work has been installed in ROM).
The requirement to provide [nstallation lntk_rmation does not include a requil_2ment to
confnue to provide support service, warranty, or updates R_ra work that has been
modified or installed by the recipient, or lor the User Product in which it has been
modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself
materially and adversely aflects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
protocols lor communicalion across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation [nfflrmation provide& in accord
with this section must be in a lbrmat that is publicly documented (and with an
implementation available to the public in source code Rlrm), and must require no
special password or key lot unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
_Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of thisLicense by
making exceptions lrom one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are
applicable to the entire Program shall be tl_2ated as though they were included in this
License, to the extent that they are wfiid under applicable law. [f additional permissions
apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those
permissions, but the enlire Program remains governed by this License without regard to
the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy (If a covered work, you may at your option remove any
additional permissions f'om thai copy, or lrom any part (if it. (Additional permissions
may be wrillen to requil_2 their own removal in certain cases when you modily the
work.) You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered
work, f_r which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, RIr material you add to a covered
work, you may (if authorized by the copyrighl holders of lhat material) supplement the
terms (If this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiling liabilily dillerently lhom the terms (If sections 15
and 16of this gicense_ or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions
in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works conlaining it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that
modified versions (if such material be marked in reasonable ways as dillerent from the
original version; or
d) Limiting the use RIr publicdy puq_xlses of names of licensors or authors of the
materiak or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law f_r use (if some trade names,
trademarks, or service marks; or
1) Requiring indemnification (if licensors and authors (if that material by anyone who
conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of
liabilily to the recipient, R_rany liability that these conlractual assumptions directly
impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further l_2strictions" within
the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received ih or any part of iL contains
a notice stating thai it is governed by this License along with a term that is a lurther
restriction, you may remove that term. [f a license document contains a further
restriction but permils relicensing or conveying under Ibis License, you may add to a
covered work material governed by the terms of that license documenh provided that
the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
[f you add terms to a covered work in accord wilh this sectiom you must place, in the
relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a
notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
X
Addilional terms_ permissive or non-permissive_ may be stated in the R_rm(if a
separately written license, or stated as exceplions; lhe above requiJ_:ments apply eilher
way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modily a covered work except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modily it is void_ and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses
granted under the third
paragraph of section 11 ).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular
copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder
explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
holder hills to notily you of lhe violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days
alter the cessalion.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if
the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the
firsl lime you have l_:ceived notice of violation of INs License (lor any work) from thai
copyright holder, and you cure the violalion prior to 30 days afler your receipt of lhe
notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does nol terminate lfie licenses of parlies
who have received copies or rights lrom you under this License. If your rights have
been terminated and not permanently l_:instated, you do not qualily to l_:ceive new
licenses lor the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not RequiJvd lor Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License ill order to receive or run a copy of the
Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence
of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
acceplance. However, nothing other than lhis License grants you permission to
propagate or modily any covered work. These actions inlringe copyrighl if you do not
accept this License. Thmvtk)re, by modit3qng or propagating a covelvd work, you
indicate your acceplance of lhis License to do so.
I0. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license
from the original licensors, to run, modil3, and propagate that work, subject to this
License. You are not ivsponsible lklr enlorcing compliance by lhird parties wilh INs
License.
An "entity transaction" is a transaction translerring control of an organizatiom or
subslantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizalions.
If propagation of a covered work results lrom an entity transaction, each party to that
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work
the party's predecessor ill interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus
a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor ill
inleresL if lhe predecessor has il or call gel il with reasonable el fi_rts.
You may not impose any further l_strictions on the exercise of the rights granted or
allirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license ti_e, royalty, or
other charge lor exercise of righls granted under this License, and you may not initiate
litigation (inchlding a cross-claim or counterclaim ill a lawsuit) alleging that ally patent
claim is infi'inged by making, using, selling, oftering RIr sale, or impofling the Program
or ally portion of it.
I 1. Patents.
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who aulfiorizes use under INs License of the
Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work lhus licensed is called the
contributor's "contributor version".
A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by
the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be inh'inged
by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling ils contributor
version, but do nol include claims thai would be infringed only as a consequence of
furlficr modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definitiom
"control" includes the right to grant patenl sublicelises ill a manner consistenl wilh lhe
requirements of this License.
Each contributor granls you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-flee patent license
under the contributor's essential patent claims, to make, use, sell oiler R)r sale, import
and otherwise run, modify and propagate the coiitents of ils contributor version.
[n lhe R)llowing lhree paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express agreement or
conlmilmenh however denonlinated, not to enthrce a patent (such as all express
permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue R)r patent infringement). To
"granP' such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreemelit or
commilmenl no[ to enfi_rce a patenl against the pafly.
If you convey a covmvd work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the
Corresponding Source of the work is nol available fi_ranyone to copy, lree of charge
and under lhe terms of INs License, through a publicly available network server or
other readily accessible means, lhen you must either (1) cause the Corresponding
Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patenl
license thr this particular work, or (3) arrange, ill a manner consistent with the
ivquirements of this License, to extend lhe patent license to downstlvam recipients.
"Knowingly relying" means you have actual knowledge thah but R)r the patent license,
your conveying lfie covered work ill a country, or your Ivcipient's use of lhe covered
work in a counl U, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in lhat country thai
you have l_ason to believe are valid.
IL pursuant to or ill conneclion with a single transaction or arrangemenh you convey,
or propagate by procuring conveyance oL a covered work, and grant a patent license to
some of lfie parties receiving the covered work aulhorizing them to use, propagate,
modily or convey aspecific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you granl
is automatically extended to all recipients (if lhe covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within the scope of its
coverage, prohibils the exercise oL or is conditioned on lhe non-exercise of one or more
of lhe rights that are specifically granted under lhis License. You may not convey a
covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third parly that is ill the
business of distributing soltware, under which you make payment to the third party
based on the extent (if your activity of conveying the work, and under which the lhird
party grants, to any of the parties who would receive lhe covered work fi'om york a
discriminatory patent license (a) in c(mnection with copies of the covered work
conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily l_orand ill
connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless
you entel_d inlo thai arrangement, or thai patenl license was granted_ prior to 28 March
2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license
or other delenses to inh'ingement that may olherwise be available to you under
applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Olhers' Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, aglvement or otherwise)
lhat contradict the conditions of lfiis License, they do not excuse you lrom the
conditions of INs License. [f you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisly
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other perlinent obligations,
lhen as a consequence you may nol convey il at all. For example, if you agree to terms
lhat obligate you to collect a royalty Ik)rhlrlfier conveying from those to whom you
convey the Program, the only way you could satisly both those terms and this License
would be to refi'ain entirely from conveying the Program.
13. Use with lhe GNU Alfi.:ro General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or
combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of lhe GNU Alf)ro
General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work.
The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
bul the special requirements oflhe GNU AftL'ro General Public License, section 13_
concerning interaclion lhrough a network will apply to lhe combinalion as such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Softwmv Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU
General Public License h'om lime to time. Such new versions will be similar in spiril to
lhe present version, bul may diller ill detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a dislinguishing version number. If the Program SlYZcifiesthai a
certain numbered version of lfie GNU General Public License "or any later version"
applies to it, you have lhe option of lolhlwing the terms and condilions either of that
numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. [f
lhe Program does not specil3, a version number of the GNU General Public License,
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Program specifies tfiat a proxy can decide which luture versions of the GNU
General Public License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a
version permanendy authorizes you to choose that version tklrthe Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or dillerent permissions. However, no
addilional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your
choosing to R)llow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranly.
THERE [S NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERM[TTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
[N WRIT[NG THE COPYR[GHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PART[ES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS [S" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY K[ND,
E[THER EXPRESSED OR IMPL[ED, [NCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
[MPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL[TY AN[) FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE R[SK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM [S WITH YOIL SHOULD THE PROGRAM
PROVE DEFECTIVL YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECT[ON.
16. Limilalion of Liability.
xi
[N NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRIT[NG WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO
MOD[F[ES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERM[TTED ABOVL BE
L[ABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUD[NG ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AR[S[NG OUT OF THE USE
OR INABIL[TY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT L[MITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR TH[RD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMSL EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADV[SED OF THE POSSIBIL[TY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
17. [nterplx:lation (if Sections 15 and 16.
lfthe disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given
klcal legal efti_ct according to their terms, ivviewing courts shall apply local law that
most closely approxinlates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
Program, unless a warranty or assumption (if liability accompanies a copy of the
Program ill return l_)r a lee.
END OF TERMS AN[) CONDIT[ONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the glvatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone call
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the lollowing notices to lhe program. It is salesl to attach lhenl to the
start of each source file to most el l)ctively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file
should have at least the "copyright?' lille and a pointer to where the full notice is lkmnd.
<one line to give the progranEs name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free soltware: you can redistribute it and/or modit3, it under the terms
(if the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundatiom
either version 3 of the License_ or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useluL but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY: without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License lk)r
more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this
program. [f iloh see <htlp://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Also add inlorn/ation on how to contact you by electronic and paper maih
If the program does terminal interaction, make it oulpul a short notice like this when it
starts in an interaclive mode:
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; lot details type "show
w'.
This is free softwmv, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions;
type "show c' lot details.
The hypothetical commands "show w' and "show c' should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands might be
dilli:l_nt; lor a GUI interlace, you would use all "about box".
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to
sign a "copyright dischdmer" l_)rthe program_ if necessary.
For more infi)rmation on this, and how to apply and lollow the GNU GPL see
<htlp://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider il more
uselul to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But
firsh please read
<htll)://www.gnu.org/1)hilosoplly/wlly-nol-lgpl.htn/l>.
GCC RLTNTIME LIBRARY EXCEPTION
Version 3.L 31 March 2009
Copyright c 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <htlp://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license documenh
but changing it is not allowed.
This GCC Runtime Library Exception ("Exception") is an additional permission under
section 7 of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). It applies to a
given file (the "Runtime Library") that bears a notice placed by the copyright holder (if
the file stating that the file is governed by GPLv3 along with lhis Exception.
When you use GCC to compile a program, GCC may combine portions of cerlain GCC
header files and runtime libraries with the compiled program. The purpose of this
Exception is to allow compilation of non-GPL (including proprietary) programs to use,
in this way, the header files and runtime libraries covered by this Exception.
0. Definitions.
A file is an "Independent Module" if it either requires the Runtime Library k)r
execution alter a Compilation Process, or makes use of an interlace provided by the
Runtime Library, but is not otherwise based (Ill the Runtime Library.
"GCC" means a version of the GNU Compiler Collection, with or without
modifications, governed by version 3 (or a specified later version) of the GNU General
Public License (GPL) with the option of using ally subsequent versions published by
the FSF.
"GPL-compatihle Softwmv" is software whose conditions of propagation, modification
and use would permit combination with GCC ill accord with the license of GCC.
"Target Code" ivti_rs to output from any compiler lbr a real or virtual target processor
architecture, in executable lorm or suitable lor input to an assembler, loader, linker and/
or execution phase.
Notwithstanding that, Target Code does not include data in any lormat that is used as a
compiler intermediate representation, or used lor producing a compiler intermediate
representation.
The "Compilation Process" transRwms code entilx:ly lx:plx:sented ill non-intermediate
languages designed l_.)rhuman-written code, and/or ill Java Virtual Machine byte code,
into Target Code. Thus, lor example, use of source code generators and preprocessors
need not be considered part of the Compilation Process, since the Compilation Process
call be understood as starling with the output of the generators or plx:processors.
A Compilation Process is "Eligible" if it is done using GCC, alone or with other GPL-
compatible soltware, or if it is done without using ally work based on G(C. For
exmnple, using non-GPL-compatible Software to optimize any GCC intermediate
representations would not qualily as an Eligible Compilation Process.
I. Grant of Additional Permission.
You have permission to propagate a work of Target Code k)rmed by combining the
Runtime Library with Independent Modules, even if such propagation would otherwise
violate the terms of GPLv3, provided that all Target Code was generated by Eligible
Compilation Processes.
You may then convey such a combillation ulider terms of your choice, colisistelit with
the licensing of the [ndependent Modules.
2. No Weakening of GCC Copyleft.
The availability of this Exception does not imply any general plvsumption that third-
party software is unaflected by the copylefl requirements of lhe license of GCC.
About c-ares
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts hlstitute of Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modily, and distribute tiffs software and its documentation tk)r
ally purpose and withoul li2eis hereby grante& provided lhat tile above copyright nolice
appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentatiom and that the name (if M.I.T. not be used in
adverlising or publicity pmlaining to distribution (if the soltware without specific,
writlen prior permission.
M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this soltware lor any purpose, h
is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
About WPA Supplicant
WPA Supplicant
Copyright (c) 2003-2012_ Jouni Malinen <j@wl .fi> and contributors
All Rights Reserved.
This program is licensed under the BSD license (the one with advertisement clause
removed).
If you are submitting changes to the prqiect, please see CONTRIBUTIONS file lk)r
more instructions.
License
Tiffs software may be distributed, used, and modified under the terms of BSD license:
Redistribution and use in source and binary tk)rms, with or without modificatiom are
permitled provided that the lk)llowing conditions are met:
I. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
condilions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary tk)rmmust reproduce the above copyright notice, tiffs list of
conditions and the R)llowing disclaimer ill the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this soltware
without specific prior written permission.
xii
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AN[)
CONTRIB UTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIB UTORS BE L[ABLE FOR ANY D[RECT_ IND[RECT, [NC[DENTAL_
SPECIAL EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ([NCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIM[TED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBST[TUTE GOODS OR SERV[CES:
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROF[TS; OR BUSINESS [NTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AN[) ON ANY THEORY OF L[AB[LITY, WHETHER [N
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUD[NG NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) AR[SING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADV[SED OF THE POSSI BIL[TY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
About libxml2
Except where otherwise noted ill the source code (e.g. the tiles hash.c, list.c mid the trio
files, which are covered by a similar licence but with diflcrent Copyright notices) all lhe
files are:
Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby grante& free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy (if this
sollware and associated documentation fiiles (the "Sollware"), to deal ill the Soltware
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modif3q merge,
publish, distribute, suhlicense, and/or sell copies of lhe Sollware, and to permit persons
to whom the Soltware is lurnished to do so, subject to the lollowing conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial poflions of the Soltware.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIN[L EXPRESS OR IMPLIE[L INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTAB[LITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFR[NGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE DANIEL
VE[LLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Excepl as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel Veillard shall not be used ill
adveflising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in Ibis Software
withoul prior written authorization flom him.
About fonts
Fonts are (c) Bitstlx2am (see below). DejaVu changes m_: ill public domain.
Glyphs imported from Arev fimts am (c) Tavmjong Bah (see below)
Bitstlx2am Vera Fonts Copyright
Copyright (c) 2(,q)3 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Bitstream Vera is a
trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
Permission is heir:by granted, flee (if charge, to ally person obtaining acopy of the lbnts
accompanying this license CFonts') and associated documentation files (the "Font
Soltware'), to reproduce and distribute lhe Font Soltware, including without fimdalion
the rights to use, copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies (if the Font
Soltware, and to permit persons to whom the Font Soltware is lurnished to do so,
subject to the lollowing conditions:
The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies (if one or more (if the Font Software typefaces.
The Font Soltware may be modified, altere& or added to, and ill particular the designs
(if glyphs or characters ill the Fonts may be modified and additional glyphs or
characters may he added to the Fonts, only if the fimts are renamed to names not
containing either the words "Bdstream" or the word "Vera'.
This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Software
that has been modified and is distributed under the "Bitstream Vera" names.
The Font Software may be sold as parl (if a larger software package but no copy (if one
or more of the Font Soltware lypelaces may he sold by itselE
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS', WITHOETT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR [MPLIE[L INCLUDING B UT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTAB[LITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFR[NGEMENT OF COPYR[GHT, PATENT,
TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE
GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
L[AB[LITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the names of Gnome, the Gnome Foundation, and
BitsW:am Inc., shall not be used ill advertising or otherwise to promote tile sale, use or
other dealings in this Font Soltware without prior written authorization from the Gnome
Foundation or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For lmlher inlormation, contact: fonts at
gllome dot org.
Al_:v Fonts Copyright
Copyright (c) 2006 by Tavmjong Bah. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby grante& flee (if charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the lonts
accompanying this license CFonts') and associated documentation files (the "Font
Soltware'), to reproduce and distribute the modifications to the Bilstmam Vera Font
Soltware, including wifllout limitation the rights to use, copy, merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies (if the Font Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Font Soltware is lurnished to do so, subject to lhe lolklwing conditions:
The above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies of one or more of the Font Soltware lypelaces.
The Font Software may be modified, altere& or added to, and ill particular the designs
of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be modified and additional glyphs or
characters may be added to the Fonts, only if the lonts are l_:named to names not
containing either the words "Tawnjong Bah" or the word "Arev'.
This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Soltware
that has been modified and is distributed under the "Tawnjong Bah Arev" names.
The Font Soltware may be sold as part of a larger software package but no copy (if one
or inol_ of the Font Software typelaces may be sold by itself.
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
WARRANT[ES OF MERCHANTAB[LITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AN[) NONINFR[NGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT,
TRADEMARK, OR OTHER R[GHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAVMJONG BAH BE
L[ABLE FOR ANY CLA[M, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABIL[TY, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPEC[AL, [NDIRECT, [NC[DENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER [N AN ACT[ON OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABIL[TY TO USE THE
FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEAL[NGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Tawnjong Bah shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings ill this Font Software
withoul prior written authorizalion from Tavn_jong Bah. For hlrlher inf)rmation_
contacl: lavmjong @ flee. fl.
===
Xlll
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment
and Used Batteries
Pb
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and
electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC
and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save wfluable resources and prevent
any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from
inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your
local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only wflid in the European Union. It you wish to discard these items, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des piles usagees et
des dechets d'equipements electriques et electroniques
Les symboles sur les produits, l'emballage et/ou les documents joints signifient que les produits dlectriques
ou dlectroniques usagds ainsi que les piles ne doivent pas _tre mdlangds avec les ddchets domestiques
habituels.
Pour un traitement, une rdcupdration et un recyclage approprids des ddchets d'dquipements dlectriques et
dlectroniques et des piles usagdes, veuillez les ddposer aux points de collecte prdvus it cet effet,
confonndment it la rdglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC et 2006/66/EC.
En vous ddbarrassant correctement des ddchets d'dquipements dlectriques et dlectroniques et des piles
usagdes, vous contribuerez it la sauvegarde de prdcieuses ressources et it la prdvention de potentiels effets
ndgatifs sur la santd humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d'un traitement inapproprid des ddchets.
Pour plus d'informations it propos de la collecte et du recyclage des ddchets d'dquipements dlectriques et
dlectroniques et des piles usagdes, veuillez contacter votre municipalitd, votre service de traitement des
ddchets ou le point de vente o_l vous avez achetd les produits.
Pb
[Information sur le traitement dans d'autres pays en dehors de I'Union Europ_enne]
Ces symboles sont seulement wflables dans l'Union Europdenne. Si vous souhaitez vous ddbarrasser de
ddchets d'dquipements dlectriques et dlectroniques ou de piles usagdes, veuillez contacter les autoritds
locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la mdthode de tmitement appropride.
Note pour le symbole "pile" (deux exemples de symbole ci-dessous):
Ce symbole peut _tre utilisd en combinaison avec un symbole chimique. Darts ce cas il respecte les
exigences dtablies par la Directive pour le produit chimique en question.
xiv
Verbraucherinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung alter
Elektroger ite und benutzter Batterien
Befinden sich diese Symbole _mf den Produkten, der Verpackung und/oder beiliegenden Unterlagen, so
sollten benutzte elektrische Gergte und Batterien nicht mit dem nonnalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden.
In l_bereinsfimmung mit Ihren nationalen Bestimmungen und den Richtlinien 2002/96/EC und
2006/66/EC, bringen Sie alte Gergte und benutzte Batterien bitte zur fachgerechten Entsorgung,
Wiedemufbereitung und Wiederverwendung zu den entsprechenden Sammelstellen.
Dutch die fachgerechte Entsorgung der Elektroger:dte und Batterien helfen Sie, wertvolle Ressourcen zu
schfitzen und verhindem m6gliche negative Auswirkungen auf die menschliche Gesundheit und die
Umwelt, die andernfalls dutch unsachgerechte Mfillentsorgung auflreten k6nnten.
Ftir weitere Informationen zum Sammeln und Wiederaufbereiten alter Elektrogergte und Batterien,
kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre 6rtliche Stadt- oder Gemeindeverwaltung, Ihren Abfallentsorgungsdienst oder
die Verkaufsstelle der Artikel.
Pb
[Entsorgungsinformation ffir L_inder aul3erhalb der Europ_iischen Union]
Diese Symbole gelten nut innerhalb der Eumpgischen Union. Wenn Sie solche Artikel ausmngieren
m6chten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre 6rtlichen Beh6rden oder Ihren Hgndler und fiagen Sie nach der
sachgerechten Entsorgungsmethode.
Anmerkung zum Batteriesymbol (untere zwei Symbolbeispiele):
Dieses Symbol kann auch in Kombination mit einem chemischen Symbol verwendet werden. In diesem
Fall entspricht dies den Anforderungen der Direktive zur Verwendung chemischer Stoffe.
Anv_indarinformation, betr_iffande insamling och dumpning av gammal
utrustning och anv_inda batterier
Pb
De symboler, sore finns p{tproduktema, emballaget och/eller bil_gade dokument talarom att de anv:dnda
elektriska och elektroniska produkterna, saint batterierna, inte ska blandas reed alhngnt hush{fllsavfall.
F6r rgtt handhawmde, {tterstgllande och {ttervinning av gamla pmdukter och gamla batterier, vgnligen
medtag dessa till lgmpliga insamlingsplatser, i enlighet reed din nationella lagstiftning och direktiven
20021961EC saint 20061661EC.
Genom att slgnga dessa produkter och batterier p{t r_tt s_tt, kommer du att hjglpa till att rgdda vgrdefulla
resurser och f6rhindra m6jliga negatiwt effekter pgtmgnsklig hglsa och milj6, vilka i annat fall skulle kunna
uppst{t, p.g.a, felaktig sophantering.
F6r met information om insamling och {ttervinning av gamla produkter och batterier, vgnligen kontakta din
lokala kommun, ditt sophanteringsf6retag eller ink6psstgllet f6r dina wtror.
[Information om sophantering i andra I_inder utanf6r EU]
Dessa symboler ggller endast inom EU. Om du viii slgnga dessa f6remM, vgnligen kontakta dina lokala
myndigheter eller f6rsgljare och figtga efter det korrekta s_ttet att slgnga dem.
Kommentar ang. batterisymbolen (de tv& nedersta symbolexemplen):
Denna symbol kan komma att anv_ndas i kombination reed en kemisk symbol. I detta fall 6verensst_mmer
den med de krav, som hat st_llts genom direktiven f6r den aktuella kemikalien.
XV
Informazioni per gli utenti sulla raccolta e Io smaltimento di vecchia
attrezzatura e batterie usate
Questi simboli sui prodotti, sull'imballaggio, e/o sui documenti the li accompagnano significano the i
prodotti e le batterie elettriche e elettroniche non dovrebbero essere mischiati con i rifiuti domestici
generici.
Per il trattamento, recupero e riciclaggio appropfiati di vecchi prodotti e batterie usate, li porti, prego, ai
punti di raccolta appropriati, in accordo con la Sua legislazione nazionale e le direttive 2002/96/CE e 2006/
66/CE.
Smaltendo correttamente questi prodotti e batterie, Lei aiuterlt a salwtre risorse preziose e a prevenire
alcuni potenziali effetti negativi sulla salute umana e l'ambiente, the altrimenti potrebbero sorgere dal
trattamento improprio dei rifiuti.
Per ulteriori informazioni sulla raccolta e il riciclaggio di vecchi prodotti e batterie, prego contatti la Sua
amministmzione comunale locale, il Suo servizio di smaltimento dei rifiuti oil punto vendita dove Lei ha
acquistato gli articoli.
Pb
[Informazioni sullo smaltimento negli altri Paesi al di fuori dell'Unione europea]
Questi simboli sono wflidi solamente nell'Unione europea. Se Lei desidera distiusi di questi articoli prego
contatti le Sue autoritlt locali o il rivenditore e richieda la corretta modalifft di smaltimento.
Noti per il simbolo della batteria (sul fondo due esempi di simbolo):
F, probabile che questo simbolo sia usato in combinazione con un simbolo chimico. In questo caso e
confonne al requisito stabilito dalla direttiwt per gli elementi chimici contenuti.
Informacion para Usuarios sobre Recoleccion y Disposicion de
Equipamiento Viejo y Baterias usadas
Estos sfinbolos en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentaci6n que se acompafie significan que los
productos electr6nicos y elgctricos usados y las baterfas usadas no deben ser mezclados con desechos
hogarefios corrientes.
Para el tratamiento, recupemci6n y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos y las baterfas usadas, por
favor lldvelos a puntos de recolecci6n aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislaci6n nacional y las directiwts
2002/96/EC y 2006/66/EC.
AI disponer de estos productos y baterfas correctamente, ayudam a ahormr recursos wfliosos y a prevenir
cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio ambiente, el cual podr/a surgir de un
inapropiado manejo de los desechos.
Pare mayor infonnaci6n sobre recolecci6n y reciclado de productos viejos y bater/as, pot favor contacte a
su municipio local, su servicio de gesti6n de residuos o el punto de venta en el cual usted adquiri6 los
art/culos.
Pb
[Informacidn sobre la Disposici6n en otros paises fuera de la Unidn Europea]
Estos sfinbolos s6lo son vfilidos en la Uni6n Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos art/culos, pot favor
contacte a sus autoridades locales y pregunte pot el mdtodo correcto de disposici6n.
Nota sobre el simbolo de la bateria (ejemplos de dos simbolos de la parte inferior)
Este sfinbolo podrfa set utilizado en combinaci6n con un sfinbolo qufinico. En este caso el mismo obedece
a un requerimiento dispuesto pot la Directiwt pare el elemento qufmico involucmdo.
xvi
Informatie voor gebruikers van inzameling en verwijdering van oude
apparaten en gebruikte batterijen
Deze tekens op de producten, verpakkingen en/of bijgaande documenten betekent dat gebruikte elektrische
en elektronische producten en batterijen niet mogen women gemengd met algemeen huishoudelijk afwfl.
Breng alstubliefi voor de juiste behandeling, herwinning en hergebruik wm oude producten en gebruikte
batterijen deze naar daarvoor bestemde verzamelpunten, in overeenstemming met uw nationale wetgeving
en de instmcties 2002/96/EC en 2006/66/EC.
Door deze producten en batterijen juist te mngschikken, helpt u het redden wm waardevolle rijkdommen en
voorkomt u mogelijke negatieve effecten op de menselijke gezondheid en de omgeving, welke zich zou
kunnen voordoen door ongepaste afwflverwerking.
Voor meet infonnatie over het inzamelen en hergebruik wm oude producten en batterijen kunt u contact
opnemen met uw plaatselijke gemeente, uw afwtlverwerkingsbedrijf of het verkooppunt waaru de
artikelen heefi gekocht.
Pb
[Informatie over verwijdering in ander landen buiten de Europese Unie]
Deze symbolen zijn alleen geldig in de Europese Unie. Mocht u artikelen weg willen gooien, neem dan
alstublieft contact op met uw plaatselijke overheidsinstantie of dealer en vmag naar de juiste manier wm
verwijderen.
Opmerking bij het batterij teken (onderkant twee tekens voorbeelden):
Dit teken wordt mogelijk gebmikt in combinatie met een chemisch teken. In dat gewfl voldoet het aan de
eis en de richtlijn, welke is opgesteld voor het betreffende chemisch product.
xvii
|mpo_ant Notice: Guarantee |nformation for customers in EEA* and Switzer|and
AVE EA71102A
For detailed guarantee information about this Yamaha product, and Pan-EEA* and Switzerland warranty service, please either
visit the website address below (Printabme timeis avaimabmeat our website) or contact the Yamaha representative office for your
country. * EEA: European Economic Area
Remarque importante: informations de garantie pour |es c|ients de PEEE et |a Suisse
Pour des informations plus detaill6es sur la garantie de ce produit Yamaha et sur le service de garantie applicable dans rensemble
de I'EEE ainsi qu'en Suisse, consultez notre site Web & I'adresse ci-dessous (le richer impfimable est disponible sur notre site
Web) ou contactez directement Yamaha dans votre pays de r6sidence. * EEE : Espace Economique Europeen
Wichtiger Hinweis: Garantie-|nformation f_ir Kunden in der EWR* end der Schweiz
F(Jrn_here Garantie-lnformation (Jberdieses Produkt yon Yamaha, sowie 0ber den Pan-EWR*- und Schweizer Garantieservice, besuchen
Sie bitte entweder die folgend angegebene Internetadresse (eine druckf&hige Version befindet sich auch auf unserer Webseite), oder
wenden Sie sich an den fQrIhr Land zust&ndigen Yamaha-Vertrieb. *EWR: Europ_ischer Wirtschaftsraum
Viktigt: Garantiinformation f_r kunder i E;ES-omr_det* och Schweiz
F6r detaljerad information om denna Yamahaprodukt samt garantiservice i hela EES-omr_det* och Schweiz kan du antingen
bes6ka nedanst&ende webbaddress (en utskriftsv_nlig fil finns p& webbplatsen) eller kontakta Yamahas officiella representant i
ditt land. * EES: Europeiska Ekonomiska Samarbetsomr&det
Awiso impo_ante: informazioni su||a garanzia per i c|ienti residenti ne|rEEA* e in Svizzera
Per informazioni dettagliate suila garanzia reiativa a questo prodotto Yamaha e rassistenza in garanzia nei paesi EEA* e in
Svizzera, potete consuitare il sito Web aWindirizzo riportato di seguito (6 disponibile il file in formato stampabile) oppure contattare
m'ufficio di rappresentanza locale della Yamaha. * EEA: Area Economica Europea
AvJso Jmportante: informaci6n sobre |a garantia para |os cHentes de| EEE* y Suiza
Para una informaci6n detallada sobre este producto Yamaha y sobre el soporte de garantia en la zona EEE* y Suiza, visite la
direccidn web que se induye m&s abajo (la version del archivo para imprimir esta disponiNe en nuestro sitio web) o p6ngase en
contacto con el representante de Yamaha en su pais. * EEE: Espacio Econ6mico Europeo
Be|angrijke mededeiing: Garantie4nformatie voor kianten in de EER* en Zwitseriand
Voor gedetailleerde garantieqnformatie over dit Yamaha-product en de garantieservice in heel de EER* en Zwitserland, gaat u
naar de onderstaande website (u vind een afdrukbaar bestand op onze website) of neemt u contact op met de vertegenwoordiging
van Yamaha in uw land. * EER: Europese Economische Ruimte
XVlll
@
L'XVCi--!ii_ _M
VIDEO
BONUS VIEW TM
Java
POWERED
m DOLBY
DIGITAL PLUS 7
_dtS
DigitalSurround
H_ITI| TM
H=_H-D_FI_ITIONMULTIM_DIA=NT_R_ACE
×.v.Color
YAMAHA CORPORATION
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation Printed in China BD-S473/G-1
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98

Yamaha BD-S473 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Reproductores de Blu-Ray
Tipo
El manual del propietario

En otros idiomas